From c82edf6bf5c3422612c36d4a4e807d28d34d6288 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Chris Davis Date: Thu, 7 Aug 2025 14:44:48 -0700 Subject: [PATCH] Add Exchange Server SE 7 --- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md | 28 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md | 12 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md | 26 +- .../Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md | 40 +- .../Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md | 26 +- .../Set-AvailabilityConfig.md | 12 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md | 100 ++--- .../Set-CalendarNotification.md | 26 +- .../Set-CalendarProcessing.md | 76 ++-- .../Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md | 10 +- .../Set-ClientAccessRule.md | 32 +- .../Set-ClientAccessServer.md | 22 +- .../Set-ClientAccessService.md | 22 +- .../Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md | 14 +- .../Set-ComplianceSearch.md | 32 +- .../Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md | 10 +- .../Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md | 18 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md | 86 ++--- .../Set-ContentFilterConfig.md | 38 +- .../Set-DataClassification.md | 20 +- .../Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md | 70 ++-- .../Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md | 20 +- .../Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md | 32 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md | 12 +- .../Set-DistributionGroup.md | 134 +++---- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md | 18 +- .../Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md | 166 ++++---- .../Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md | 40 +- .../Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md | 38 +- .../Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md | 64 ++-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md | 10 +- .../Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md | 44 +-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md | 14 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md | 40 +- .../Set-ExchangeSettings.md | 62 +-- .../Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md | 20 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md | 22 +- .../Set-ForeignConnector.md | 32 +- .../Set-FrontendTransportService.md | 90 ++--- .../Set-GlobalAddressList.md | 56 +-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md | 34 +- .../Set-HybridConfiguration.md | 30 +- .../Set-IPAllowListConfig.md | 14 +- .../Set-IPAllowListProvider.md | 24 +- .../Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md | 14 +- .../Set-IPBlockListConfig.md | 18 +- .../Set-IPBlockListProvider.md | 26 +- .../Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md | 16 +- .../Set-IRMConfiguration.md | 28 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md | 64 ++-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md | 140 +++---- .../Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md | 16 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md | 22 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md | 132 +++---- .../Set-MailPublicFolder.md | 118 +++--- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md | 154 ++++---- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md | 362 +++++++++--------- .../Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md | 12 +- .../Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md | 38 +- .../Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md | 44 +-- .../Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md | 26 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md | 74 ++-- .../Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md | 20 +- .../Set-MailboxExportRequest.md | 34 +- .../Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md | 14 +- .../Set-MailboxImportRequest.md | 30 +- .../Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md | 24 +- .../Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md | 86 ++--- .../Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md | 20 +- .../Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md | 32 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md | 56 +-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md | 82 ++-- .../Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md | 18 +- .../Set-MailboxTransportService.md | 90 ++--- .../Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md | 48 +-- .../Set-MalwareFilterRule.md | 30 +- .../Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md | 32 +- .../Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md | 8 +- .../Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md | 26 +- .../Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md | 18 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md | 20 +- .../Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md | 24 +- .../Set-MessageClassification.md | 26 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md | 44 +-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md | 14 +- .../Set-MigrationEndpoint.md | 20 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md | 16 +- .../Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md | 114 +++--- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md | 52 +-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md | 14 +- .../Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md | 30 +- .../Set-OfflineAddressBook.md | 50 +-- .../Set-OrganizationConfig.md | 170 ++++---- .../Set-OrganizationRelationship.md | 48 +-- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md | 36 +- .../Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md | 26 +- .../ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md | 22 +- 97 files changed, 2219 insertions(+), 2215 deletions(-) diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md index 8bdf7d268b..08daf7b0f5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ This example immediately rolls over the certificate configured as the next certi ### -CertificateThumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CertificateThumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of the certificate to be used by Exchange for server-to-server authentication. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearPreviousCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClearPreviousCertificate switch clears the certificate that was saved as the previous certificate in the authorization configuration. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewCertificateEffectiveDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NewCertificateEffectiveDate parameter specifies a date when the certificate configured as the next certificate should be used. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewCertificateThumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NewCertificateThumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of the new certificate to be used as the next certificate in the authorization configuration. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PublishCertificate switch immediately rolls over the specified certificate as the current certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Realm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Realm parameter specifies a security realm for partner applications. If a service or user presents a token from a domain that's not an accepted domain in the Exchange organization, the token must contain the specified realm to gain access to resources. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter isn't available in this release. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ServiceName parameter identifies Microsoft Exchange to other partner applications such as SharePoint 2013. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipImmediateCertificateDeployment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipImmediateCertificateDeployment switch specifies that the certificate shouldn't be used immediately. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md index f23fcfa6f2..0629cf6d1d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example sets the TargetURL value for all existing OAuth redirection objects ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the existing OAuth redirection object that you want to modify. The object name uses the syntax `AuthRedirect-Bearer-GUID`. The easiest way to find the name of the OAuth redirection object is to run Get-AuthRedirect. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetUrl parameter specifies the FQDN of the Exchange 2013 Client Access server that processes the Oauth request. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md index 5419f5f7de..ad946cfe01 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ This command disables the authorization server ACS. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the authorization server object that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the authorization server. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available in the April 18, 2025 Hotfix update (HU) for Exchange 2019 CU15 and Exchange 2016 CU23. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthMetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL of the authorization server. This can be the AuthMetadataUrl of your Exchange Online organization. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange Server 2016 (CU18 or higher) and Exchange Server 2019 (CU7 or higher). @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the authorization server is enabled. Only enabled authorization servers can issue and accept tokens. Disabling the authorization server prevents any partner applications configured to use the authorization server from getting a token. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefaultAuthorizationEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsDefaultAuthorizationEndpoint parameter specifies whether this server is the default authorization endpoint. Valid values are: @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the authorization server object. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshAuthMetadata -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RefreshAuthMetadata switch specifies whether Exchange should refresh the auth metadata from the specified URL. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustAnySSLCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TrustAnySSLCertificate switch allows Exchange to accept certificates from untrusted certification authorities (CAs). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md index cf7790c298..41d628b916 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example blocks legacy Exchange tokens from being issued ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the authentication policy you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -834,7 +834,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md index ca01c30e74..1691eb2ac3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example sets Integrated Windows authentication for the Autodiscover virtual ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Autodiscover virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OAuthAuthentication parameter specifies whether OAuth authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSecurityAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WSSecurityAuthentication parameter specifies whether WS-Security (Web Services Security) authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md index 1eb3727049..dad6108eeb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrgWideAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PerUserAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md index e4545c1e31..07ac50c1d5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ This example sets the display name and disables Outlook Anywhere access for the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to configure. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncAllowedDeviceIDs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online TheActiveSyncAllowedDeviceIDs parameter specifies one or more Exchange ActiveSync device IDs that are allowed to synchronize with the mailbox. A device ID is a text string that uniquely identifies the device. Use the Get-MobileDevice cmdlet to see the devices that have Exchange ActiveSync partnerships with the mailbox. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncBlockedDeviceIDs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncBlockedDeviceIDs parameter specifies one or more Exchange ActiveSync device IDs that aren't allowed to synchronize with the mailbox. A device ID is a text string that uniquely identifies the device. Use the Get-MobileDevice cmdlet to see the devices that have Exchange ActiveSync partnerships with the mailbox. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncDebugLogging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncDebugLogging parameter enables or disables Exchange ActiveSync debug logging for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using Exchange ActiveSync. Valid values are: @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy parameter specifies the Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy for the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy. For example: @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncSuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncSuppressReadReceipt parameter controls the behavior of read receipts for Exchange ActiveSync clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ECPEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowEntourage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowEntourage parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox by Microsoft Entourage clients that use Exchange Web Services (for example, Entourage 2008 for Mac, Web Services Edition). @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowList parameter specifies the Exchange Web Services applications (user agent strings) that are allowed to access the mailbox. @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowMacOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowMacOutlook parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox by Outlook for Mac clients that use Exchange Web Services (for example, Outlook for Mac 2011 or later). Valid values are: @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowOutlook parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox by Outlook clients that use Exchange Web Services. Outlook uses Exchange Web Services for free/busy, out-of-office settings, and calendar sharing. Valid values are: @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsApplicationAccessPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter controls access to the mailbox using Exchange Web Services applications. @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsBlockList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsBlockList parameter specifies the Exchange Web Services applications (user agent strings) that aren't allowed to access the mailbox using Exchange Web Services. @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using Exchange Web Services clients. Valid values are: @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using IMAP4 clients. Valid values are: @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapEnableExactRFC822Size -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption parameter specifies how meeting requests are presented to IMAP4 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat parameter specifies the message format for IMAP4 clients that access the mailbox. You can use an integer or a text value. Valid values are: @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapSuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapSuppressReadReceipt parameter controls the behavior of read receipts for IMAP4 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapUseProtocolDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapUseProtocolDefaults parameter specifies whether to use the IMAP4 protocol defaults for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsOptimizedForAccessibility -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookNonCachedMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookExternalConnectivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookRpcHttp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookVersions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -901,7 +901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MAPIEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using MAPI clients (for example, Outlook). Valid values are: @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MapiHttpEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1015,7 +1015,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App or OWA) and the new Outlook for Windows. Valid values are: @@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAforDevicesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAforDevicesEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using the older Outlook Web App (OWA) app on iOS and Android devices. Valid values are: @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaMailboxPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OwaMailboxPolicy parameter specifies the Outlook on the web mailbox policy for the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Outlook on the web mailbox policy. For example: @@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using POP3 clients. Valid values are: @@ -1106,7 +1106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopEnableExactRFC822Size -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1131,7 +1131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption parameter specifies how meeting requests are presented to POP3 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat parameter specifies the message format for POP3 clients that access the mailbox. You can use an integer or a text value. Valid values are: @@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopSuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopSuppressReadReceipt parameter controls the behavior of read receipts for POP3 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1205,7 +1205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopUseProtocolDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopUseProtocolDefaults parameter specifies whether to use the POP3 protocol defaults for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1233,7 +1233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderClientAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolderClientAccess parameter enables or disables access to public folders in Microsoft Outlook. Valid values are: @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetAutoBlockedDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1294,7 +1294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowGalAsDefaultView -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowGalAsDefaultView parameter specifies whether the global address list (GAL) is the default recipient picker for messages. Valid values are: @@ -1391,7 +1391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md index c20aafc1af..f2b894c1dd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example configures the calendar in Tony's mailbox to send the following tex ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarUpdateNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarUpdateNotification parameter specifies whether calendar update text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarUpdateSendDuringWorkHour -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarUpdateSendDuringWorkHour parameter specifies whether calendar update text notifications are sent to the user's mobile device during working hours only. Valid values are: @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DailyAgendaNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DailyAgendaNotification parameter specifies whether daily agenda text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DailyAgendaNotificationSendTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DailyAgendaNotificationSendTime parameter specifies the time to send daily agenda text message notifications to the user's mobile device. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MeetingReminderNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MeetingReminderNotification parameter specifies whether meeting reminder text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MeetingReminderSendDuringWorkHour -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MeetingReminderSendDuringWorkHour parameter specifies whether meeting reminder text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device during working hours only. Valid values are: @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NextDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NextDays parameter specifies how many days should be sent in the daily agenda text message notification to the user's mobile device. A valid value is an integer between 1 and 7. The default value is 1. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md index da0a5b0cfd..2412c29cdc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ This example rejects meeting requests from any user who isn't a member of the Ex ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the resource mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddAdditionalResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddAdditionalResponse parameter specifies whether additional information (the value of the AdditionalResponse parameter) is added to meeting request responses. Valid values are: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdditionalResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AdditionalResponse parameter specifies the additional information to be included in responses to meeting requests when the value of the AddAdditionalResponse parameter is $true. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddNewRequestsTentatively -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddNewRequestsTentatively parameter specifies whether new meeting requests are added to the calendar as tentative. Valid values are: @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddOrganizerToSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddOrganizerToSubject parameter specifies whether the meeting organizer's name is used as the subject of the meeting request. Valid values are: @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllBookInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllBookInPolicy parameter specifies whether to automatically approve in-policy requests from all users to the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConflicts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConflicts parameter specifies whether to allow conflicting meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRecurringMeetings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRecurringMeetings parameter specifies whether to allow recurring meetings in meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllRequestInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllRequestInPolicy parameter specifies whether to allow all users to submit in-policy requests to the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllRequestOutOfPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllRequestOutOfPolicy parameter specifies whether to allow all users to submit out-of-policy requests to the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutomateProcessing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutomateProcessing parameter enables or disables calendar processing on the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingWindowInDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BookingWindowInDays parameter specifies the maximum number of days in advance that the resource can be reserved. A valid value is an integer from 0 through 1080. The default value is 180 days. The value 0 means today. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BookInPolicy parameter specifies users or groups who are allowed to submit in-policy meeting requests to the resource mailbox that are automatically approved. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user or group. For example: @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictPercentageAllowed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConflictPercentageAllowed parameter specifies the maximum percentage of meeting conflicts for new recurring meeting requests. A valid value is an integer from 0 through 100. The default value is 0. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteAttachments parameter specifies whether to remove attachments from all incoming messages. Valid values are: @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteComments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteComments parameter specifies whether to remove or keep any text in the message body of incoming meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteNonCalendarItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteNonCalendarItems parameter specifies whether to remove or keep all non-calendar-related messages that are received by the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteSubject parameter specifies whether to remove or keep the subject of incoming meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableResponseDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnableResponseDetails parameter specifies whether to include the reasons for accepting or declining a meeting in the response email message. Valid values are: @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnforceSchedulingHorizon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnforceSchedulingHorizon parameter controls the behavior of recurring meetings that extend beyond the date specified by the BookingWindowInDays parameter. Valid values are: @@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardRequestsToDelegates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardRequestsToDelegates parameter specifies whether to forward incoming meeting requests to the delegates that are configured for the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -765,7 +765,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumConflictInstances -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaximumConflictInstances parameter specifies the maximum number of conflicts for new recurring meeting requests when the AllowRecurringMeetings parameter is set to $true. A valid value is an integer from 0 through INT32 (2147483647). The default value is 0. @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumDurationInMinutes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaximumDurationInMinutes parameter specifies the maximum duration in minutes for meeting requests. A valid value is an integer from 0 through INT32 (2147483647). The default value is 1440 (24 hours). @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizerInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizerInfo parameter specifies whether the resource mailbox sends organizer information when a meeting request is declined because of conflicts. Valid values are: @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProcessExternalMeetingMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProcessExternalMeetingMessages parameter specifies whether to process meeting requests that originate outside the Exchange organization. Valid values are: @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveForwardedMeetingNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoveForwardedMeetingNotifications parameter specifies whether forwarded meeting notifications are moved to the Deleted Items folder after they're processed by the Calendar Attendant. Valid values are: @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveOldMeetingMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoveOldMeetingMessages parameter specifies whether the Calendar Attendant removes old and redundant updates and responses. Valid values are: @@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePrivateProperty -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemovePrivateProperty parameter specifies whether to clear the private flag for incoming meetings that were sent by the organizer in the original requests. Valid values are: @@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestInPolicy parameter specifies users who are allowed to submit in-policy meeting requests to the resource mailbox that require approval by a resource mailbox delegate. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestOutOfPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestOutOfPolicy parameter specifies users who are allowed to submit out-of-policy requests that require approval by a resource mailbox delegate. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceDelegates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceDelegates parameter specifies users can approve or reject requests that are sent to the resource mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScheduleOnlyDuringWorkHours -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ScheduleOnlyDuringWorkHours parameter specifies whether to allow meetings to be scheduled outside of the working hours that are defined for the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TentativePendingApproval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TentativePendingApproval parameter specifies whether to mark pending requests as tentative on the calendar. Valid values are: @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md index 53a24290a9..2d0a4b5f89 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example imports the classification rule collection file C:\\My Documents\\E ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the classification rule collection file you want to import. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md index c608194cb5..35a73dec35 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ This example adds the IP address range 172.17.17.27/16 to the existing client ac ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the client access rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the client access rule. For example: @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Action parameter specifies the action for the client access rule. Valid values for this parameter are AllowAccess and DenyAccess. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfProtocols -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfProtocols parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's protocol. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the client access rule is enabled or disabled. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies an exception for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptUsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the client access rule. @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the client access rule. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, and a higher priority rule is evaluated before a lower priority rule. The default value is 1. @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Scope parameter specifies the scope of the client access rule. Valid values are: @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserRecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md index c508f745f4..0c106a7e10 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example configures the internal Autodiscover URL for the Active Directory s ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateServiceAccountCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateServiceAccountCredential parameter specifies an alternative service account username and password that's typically used for Kerberos authentication in Exchange Server 2010 coexistence environments. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Array -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri parameter specifies the internal URL of the Autodiscover service. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverSiteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverSiteScope parameter specifies the Active Directory site that the Autodiscover service is authoritative for. Clients that connect to the Autodiscover service by using the internal URL need to exist in the specified site. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously configured alternate service account that's no longer valid. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously distributed alternate service account. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md index 054020ca76..67d8e44f47 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example configures the internal Autodiscover URL for the Active Directory s ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateServiceAccountCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateServiceAccountCredential parameter specifies an alternative service account that's typically used for Kerberos authentication in Exchange Server 2010 coexistence environments. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Array -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri parameter specifies the internal URL of the Autodiscover service. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverSiteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverSiteScope parameter specifies the Active Directory site that the Autodiscover service is authoritative for. Clients that connect to the Autodiscover service by using the internal URL need to exist in the specified site. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously configured alternate service account that's no longer valid. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously distributed alternate service account. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md index 1076192f9a..4ce86eaea0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example changes the priority of the fictitious "Validation Agent" cmdlet ex ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the cmdlet extension agent that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the agent. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the cmdlet extension agent. The maximum length of the agent name is 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the priority of the cmdlet extension agent. Higher priority agents are applied before lower priority agents. A valid value is an integer from 0 to 255. Lower integer values indicate higher priority. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md index 77914d94f0..1cc1cdb8a1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ You might have to change the language setting if you're using non-English keywor ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search that you want to modify. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The AddExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to add to the list of included mailboxes when you aren't using the value All for the ExchangeLocation parameter. Valid values are: @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled parameter specifies whether to include mailboxes other than regular user mailboxes in the compliance search. Valid values are: @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentMatchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ContentMatchQuery parameter specifies a content search filter. @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies a description for the compliance search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to include. Valid values are: @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Language parameter specifies the language for the compliance search. @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The RemoveExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to remove from the list of included mailboxes when you aren't using the value All for the ExchangeLocation parameter. Valid values are: @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md index 7b3b7caae8..60be06c85d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example changes the export key on the export compliance search action named ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search action that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the compliance search action. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChangeExportKey -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ChangeExportKey switch creates a new export key for the compliance search action. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md index 40742de678..f69d0441f0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example removes user annb@contoso.com to the compliance security filter nam ### -FilterName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The FilterName parameter specifies the name of the compliance security filter that you want to modify. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Action parameter specifies that type of search action that the filter is applied to. A valid value for this parameter is All, which means the filter is applied to all search actions. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies a description for the compliance security filter. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Filters parameter specifies the search criteria for the compliance security filter. You can create three different types of filters: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Region -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Region parameter specifies the satellite location for multi-geo tenants to conduct eDiscovery searches in. Valid values are: @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Users -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Users parameter specifies the user who gets this filter applied to their searches. Valid values are: @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md index cfd2ce2f56..835d80fec1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Change the Company parameter value to Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the contact that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the contact. For example: @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUMCallsFromNonUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssistantName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AssistantName parameter specifies the name of the contact's assistant. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -City -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The City parameter specifies the contact's city. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Company -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Company parameter specifies the contact's company. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CountryOrRegion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CountryOrRegion parameter specifies the contact's country or region. A valid value is a valid ISO 3166-1 two-letter country code (for example, AU for Australia) or the corresponding friendly name for the country (which might be different from the official ISO 3166 Maintenance Agency short name). @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Department -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Department parameter specifies the contact's department. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the contact. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fax -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Fax parameter specifies the contact's fax number. @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GeoCoordinates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GeoCoordinates parameter specifies the contact's location in latitude, longitude and (optionally) altitude coordinates. A valid value for this parameter uses one of the following formats: @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HomePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HomePhone parameter specifies the contact's home telephone number. @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Manager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Manager parameter specifies the contact's manager. @@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobilePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MobilePhone parameter specifies the contact's primary mobile phone number. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the contact. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Office -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Office parameter specifies the user's physical office name or number. @@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherFax -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherFax parameter specifies the contact's alternative fax number. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherHomePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherHomePhone parameter specifies the contact's alternative home telephone number. @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherTelephone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherTelephone parameter specifies the contact's alternative office telephone number. @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Pager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Pager parameter specifies the contact's pager number. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Phone parameter specifies the contact's office telephone number. @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -644,7 +644,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PostalCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PostalCode parameter specifies the contact's postal code. @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PostOfficeBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PostOfficeBox parameter specifies the contact's post office box number. @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SeniorityIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SeniorityIndex parameter specifies the order in which this contact displays in a hierarchical address book. A contact with a value of 2 displays higher in an address book than a contact with a value of 1. @@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The StateOrProvince parameter specifies the contact's state or province. @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StreetAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The StreetAddress parameter specifies the contact's physical address. @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TelephoneAssistant -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TelephoneAssistant parameter specifies the telephone number of the contact's assistant. @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Title -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Title parameter specifies the contact's title. @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMCallingLineIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebPage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WebPage parameter specifies the contact's web page. @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md index e16cf78246..a7340abe9d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ It defines two users for whom the Content Filter doesn't process messages. ### -BypassedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedRecipients parameter specifies the SMTP addresses of recipients who skip processing by the Content Filter agent. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassedSenderDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedSenderDomains parameter specifies the sender email address domains of senders who skip processing by the Content Filter agent. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassedSenders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedSenders parameter specifies the SMTP addresses of senders who skip processing by the Content Filter agent. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter enables or disables the Content Filter agent on the computer on which you're running the command. Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages from unauthenticated connections from sources external to your Exchange organization are processed by the Content Filter agent. Valid values are: @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages from authenticated connections and from authoritative domains in your enterprise are processed by the Content Filter agent. Valid values are: @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookEmailPostmarkValidationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutlookEmailPostmarkValidationEnabled parameter specifies whether Outlook Email Postmark validation is enabled. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QuarantineMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QuarantineMailbox parameter specifies an SMTP address to be used as a spam quarantine mailbox. A spam quarantine mailbox is required when you set the SCLQuarantineEnabled parameter to $true. All messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLQuarantineThreshold parameter are sent to the SMTP address that you set in this parameter. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectionResponse parameter specifies the message body that you want delivered in the non-delivery report (NDR) to senders whose messages meet or exceed the SCLRejectThreshold value. The RejectionResponse parameter is required if you set the SCLRejectEnabled parameter to $true. The RejectionResponse parameter takes a string. Don't exceed 240 characters in the argument. When you pass an argument, you must enclose the RejectionResponse parameter in quotation marks (") if the phrase contains spaces, for example: "Message rejected". The default setting is Message rejected due to content restrictions. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLDeleteEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLDeleteThreshold parameter are deleted. Valid values are: @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLDeleteThreshold parameter specifies an integer value from 1 through 9. This value represents the SCL rating that a particular message must meet or exceed for the Content Filter agent to delete the message and not send an NDR. To enable this functionality, you must set the SCLDeleteEnabled parameter to $true. The default setting is 9. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLQuarantineEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLQuarantineThreshold parameter are sent to the spam quarantine mailbox specified in the QuarantineMailbox parameter. Valid values are: @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLQuarantineThreshold parameter specifies an integer value from 1 through 9. This value represents the SCL rating that a particular message must meet or exceed for the Content Filter agent to quarantine the message. To enable quarantine functionality, you must set the SCLQuarantineEnabled parameter to $true, and provide a valid SMTP address in the QuarantineMailbox parameter. The default setting is 9. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLRejectEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLRejectThreshold parameter are rejected in an NDR to the sender. Valid values are: @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLRejectThreshold parameter specifies an integer value from 1 through 9. This value represents the SCL rating that a particular message must meet or exceed for the Content Filter agent to reject the message and send an NDR to the sender. To enable the delete functionality, you must set the SCLDeleteEnabled parameter to $true. Also, you can revise the default NDR message by editing the RejectionResponse parameter. The default setting is 7. @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md index 96da55616a..eb9441e324 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ The first three commands return the list of document fingerprints in the data cl ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the data classification rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the data classification rule. For example: @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the data classification rule. You use the Description parameter with the Locale and Name parameters to specify descriptions for the data classification rule in different languages. The localized values of Description appear in the AllLocalizedDescriptions property of the data classification rule. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fingerprints -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Fingerprints parameter specifies the byte-encoded document files that are used as fingerprints by the data classification rule. For instructions on how to import documents to use as templates for fingerprints, see [New-Fingerprint](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchangepowershell/new-fingerprint) or the Examples section. For instructions on how to add and remove document fingerprints from an existing data classification rule, see the Examples section. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault switch is used with the Locale parameter to specify the default language for the data classification rule. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Locale parameter adds or removes languages that are associated with the data classification rule. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the data classification rule. The value must be less than 256 characters. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index 050d159a8c..1e2ff17c90 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ This example configures the DAG DAG1 for AutoReseed using custom mount point pat ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG that you want to modify. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCrossSiteRpcClientAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of an alternate directory that's used to store file share witness data. The specified directory must not be in use by any other DAGs or used for any other purpose. This parameter is used only as part of a datacenter switchover process. If the DAG is extended across multiple datacenters in a site resilience configuration, we recommend preconfiguring the alternate witness server and directory. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessServer parameter specifies the name of an alternate server that's used to store file share witness data. The specified server must not be a member of the DAG that's configured to use it. This parameter is used only as part of a datacenter switchover process. If the DAG is extended across multiple datacenters in a site resilience configuration, we recommend preconfiguring the alternate witness server and directory. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagAllServersInstalled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagAutoRedistributeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagAutoRedistributeEnabled parameter specifies whether automatic DAG redistribution is enabled or disabled during AutoReseed. The default value is $true (enabled). @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagAutoReseedEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagAutoReseedEnabled is used to enable or disable Autoreseed. The default value is $true (enabled). @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagBitlockerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagBitlockerEnabled parameter ensures that Disk Reclaimer handles spare disks correctly and encrypts them with BitLocker. If Bitlocker is used to encrypt database disks, set the value of this parameter to $true on all Mailbox servers in the DAG after they are all running Exchange 2013 CU13 or later, or Exchange 2016 CU2 or later. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDatabaseCopiesPerDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDatabaseCopiesPerVolume -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagDatabaseCopiesPerVolume parameter is used to specify the configured number of database copies per volume. This parameter is used only with AutoReseed. @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDatabasesRootFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagDatabasesRootFolderPath parameter specifies the directory containing the database mount points when using AutoReseed. This parameter is required when using AutoReseed. AutoReseed uses a default path of C:\\ExchangeDatabases. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDiskReclaimerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagDiskReclaimerEnabled is used to enable or disable the volume formatting functions used by Autoreseed. The default value is $true (enabled). If you set this to $false, you need to manually format the volume before the database(s) can be reseeded. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagTotalNumberOfDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagTotalNumberOfServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagVolumesRootFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagVolumesRootFolderPath parameter specifies the volume containing the mount points for all disks, including spare disks, when using the AutoReseed feature of the DAG. This parameter is required when using AutoReseed. AutoReseed uses a default path of C:\\ExchangeVolumes. @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DagConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter specifies one or more static IP addresses to the DAG when a Mailbox server is added to a DAG. If you omit the DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter when creating a DAG, the system attempts to lease one or more IP addresses from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server in your organization to assign to the DAG. You must specify this parameter each time an additional IP address is added to the DAG, such as in the case of multi-subnet DAGs. You must also specify all IP addresses previously assigned to the DAG each time the DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter is used. Setting the DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter to a value of 0.0.0.0 automatically configures the DAG to use DHCP. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatacenterActivationMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatacenterActivationMode parameter specifies the datacenter activation mode for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoverNetworks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoverNetworks switch specifies whether to force a rediscovery of the network and network interfaces. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileSystem -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileSystem parameter specifies the file system that's used for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManualDagNetworkConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ManualDagNetworkConfiguration parameter specifies whether DAG networks should be automatically configured. If this parameter is set to $false, DAG networks are automatically configured. If this parameter is set to $true, you must manually configure DAG networks. @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetaCacheDatabaseVolumesPerServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NetworkCompression -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NetworkCompression parameter specifies the network compression option for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NetworkEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NetworkEncryption parameter specifies the network encryption option for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferenceMoveFrequency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreferenceMoveFrequency parameter specifies how frequently the Microsoft Exchange Replication service inspects and automatically rebalances the database copies. If the most preferred database copy (ActivationPreference value of 1) isn't the active copy, the most preferred database copy is activated by performing a lossless switchover. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayLagManagerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayLagManagerEnabled parameter specifies whether to disable the automatic playdown of log files for a lagged database copy. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationPort -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationPort parameter specifies a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for replication (log shipping and seeding) activity. If this parameter isn't specified, the default port for replication is TCP 64327. @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDagValidation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipDagValidation switch specifies whether to bypass the validation of the DAG's quorum model and the health check on the DAG's witness when configuring the DAG. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of the directory on the server that's used to store file share witness data. The specified directory must not be in use by any other DAGs. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessServer parameter specifies the name of a server that acts as a witness for the DAG. The server specified can't be a member of the DAG. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md index 26432fbd03..0679873a53 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example disables the DAG network DAGNetwork02 in the DAG DAG2 for replicati ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the DAG network being configured. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the DAG network. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNetwork -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreNetwork parameter indicates that the specified network should be ignored and not used by the DAG. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter provides a name for the DAG network. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationEnabled parameter specifies whether the network can be used for replication activity. If this parameter isn't specified, the default behavior is to enable the network for replication. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subnets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Subnets parameter specifies one or more subnets that are associated with the DAG network. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md index 4996845f35..dd3062b215 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example uses the temporary variable $ConnectorConfig to add the address spa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or name of the delivery agent connector. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names that the delivery agent connector is responsible for. The complete syntax for entering an address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. Enclose each address space in quotation marks ("). @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryProtocol -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeliveryProtocol parameter specifies the communication protocol that determines which delivery agents are responsible for servicing the connector. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the delivery agent connector is enabled. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. If the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in your organization. If the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can only be used by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections this connector accepts from a specific IP address. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that's allowed to pass through this connector. When you enter a value, qualify the value with one of the following units: @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages this connector accepts per connection. The connector terminates the connection after this limit is reached and the sending server has to initiate a new connection to send more messages. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of this delivery agent connector. The value for the Name parameter can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the list of Mailbox servers that host this connector. You can specify more than one server by separating their names with commas. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md index 95bb18e238..3afb7ff226 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example sets attributes for the User details template for the U.S. English ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the details template using a GUID or specifies a template type and language separated by a slash. The following is an example of the user template type and U.S. English language: en-us\\User. Details template types include: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Pages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md index 01e017c678..0a06420b0c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ This example changes the name of an existing distribution group from Ed\_DirectR ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassNestedModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ByPassNestedModerationEnabled parameter specifies how to handle message approval when a moderated group contains other moderated groups as members. Valid values are: @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -781,7 +781,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -863,7 +863,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpansionServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -938,7 +938,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this group. Although messages send on behalf of the group clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the group, not the sender. @@ -1065,7 +1065,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -1110,7 +1110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNamingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IgnoreNamingPolicy switch specifies whether to prevent this group from being affected by your organization's group naming policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1155,7 +1155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A group must have at least one owner. If you don't use this parameter to specify the owner when you create the group, the user account that created the group is the owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -1254,7 +1254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1287,7 +1287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberDepartRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberDepartRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to leave the group. Valid values are: @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberJoinRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberJoinRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to join the group. Valid values are: @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1396,7 +1396,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1419,7 +1419,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1437,7 +1437,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. You can't use the EmailAddresses and PrimarySmtpAddress parameters in the same command. @@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToManagerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToManagerEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to the owner (first one listed if more than one) of the group (defined by the ManagedBy property). Valid values are: @@ -1589,7 +1589,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to senders who send messages to this group. Valid values are: @@ -1612,7 +1612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -1653,7 +1653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RoomList switch specifies that all members of this distribution group are room mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1673,7 +1673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1693,7 +1693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies how to handle out of office (OOF) messages for members of the group. Valid values are: @@ -1738,7 +1738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1832,7 +1832,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md index 5229b5b8b3..40a9e4886b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example disables the DLP policy named Employee Numbers. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the DLP policy. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mode parameter specifies the action and notification level of the DLP policy. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the DLP policy. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The State parameter enables or disables the DLP policy. Valid input for this parameter is Enabled or Disabled. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md index 66ffc8fef1..436da59675 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ This example applies the following changes to the existing dynamic distribution ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the dynamic distribution group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the dynamic distribution group. For example: @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -769,7 +769,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -861,7 +861,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1113,7 +1113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the dynamic distribution group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1189,7 +1189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpansionServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1326,7 +1326,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1374,7 +1374,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1418,7 +1418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this dynamic distribution group. Although messages send on behalf of the group clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the group, not the sender. @@ -1473,7 +1473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -1546,7 +1546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1569,7 +1569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A dynamic group can only have one owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -1630,7 +1630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1663,7 +1663,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1750,7 +1750,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the dynamic distribution group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1768,7 +1768,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. You can't use the EmailAddresses and PrimarySmtpAddress parameters in the same command. @@ -1826,7 +1826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientContainer parameter specifies a filter that's based on the recipient's location in Active Directory. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -1880,7 +1880,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1915,7 +1915,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1950,7 +1950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1987,7 +1987,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToManagerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToManagerEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to the owners of the group (defined by the ManagedBy property). Valid values are: @@ -2010,7 +2010,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to senders who send messages to this group. Valid values are: @@ -2033,7 +2033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -2054,7 +2054,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -2078,7 +2078,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies how to handle out of office (OOF) messages for members of the group. Valid values are: @@ -2099,7 +2099,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -2123,7 +2123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2175,7 +2175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -2193,7 +2193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md index dfc2e8dfb3..7ef6fa85ed 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example turns off the Internet access to the EAC on server named Server01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ECP virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdfsAuthentication parameter specifies that the ECP virtual directory allows users to authenticate through Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) authentication. This parameter accepts $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdminEnabled parameter specifies that the EAC isn't able to be accessed through the Internet. For more information, see [Turn off access to the Exchange admin center](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/architecture/client-access/disable-exchange-admin-center-access). This parameter accepts $true or $false. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods supported on the Exchange server from outside the firewall. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FormsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FormsAuthentication parameter specifies whether forms-based authentication is enabled on the ECP virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GzipLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GzipLevel parameter sets Gzip configuration information for the ECP virtual directory. @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE {{ Fill OAuthAuthentication Description }} @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaOptionsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaOptionsEnabled parameter specifies that Outlook on the web Options is enabled for end users. If this parameter is set to $false, users aren't able to access Outlook on the web Options. You might want to disable access if your organization uses non-Microsoft provider tools. This parameter accepts $true or $false. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md index 46b76be6cb..12e35df0ce 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ The log files are kept for 3 days. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service you want to configure. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service synchronizes configuration data. The default value is 3 minutes. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CookieValidDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CookieValidDuration parameter specifies how long a cookie record is valid. The default value is 21 days. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FailoverDCInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FailoverDCInterval parameter specifies how long EdgeSync waits before failing over to another domain controller if it can't read configuration data from Active Directory. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service can maintain an exclusive lock on the synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an exclusive lock on synchronization rights, no other EdgeSync service can take over synchronization. The default value is 6 minutes. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockRenewalDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockRenewalDuration parameter specifies how long before the expiry of an exclusive lock an EdgeSync service can renew the lock. The default value is 4 minutes. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogEnabled parameter specifies enables or disables the EdgeSyncLog. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogLevel parameter specifies the EdgeSync logging level. Valid values are: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum duration in days to keep the EdgeSyncLog files. Log files older than the specified value can be overwritten. The default value is 30 days. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxDirectorySize specifies the maximum amount of disk space the EdgeSyncLog directory can use. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum log file size for the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogPath parameter specifies the disk location to store the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is TransportRoles\\Logs\\EdgeSync\\. @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the EdgeSync service configuration. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OptionDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OptionDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service can maintain an optional lock on the synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an optional lock on synchronization rights, another EdgeSync service can take over synchronization after the optional lock has expired if it's initiated using the Start-EdgeSynchronization command. The default value is 30 minutes. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service synchronizes recipient data from the global catalog. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md index 1c7aeb2dd0..0e369a50c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example modifies the existing email address policy name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the email address policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnabledEmailAddressTemplates parameter specifies the rules in the email address policy that are used to generate email addresses for recipients. @@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate parameter specifies the rule in the email address policy that's used to generate the primary SMTP email addresses for recipients. You can use this parameter instead of the EnabledEmailAddressTemplates if the policy only applies the primary email address and no additional proxy addresses. @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the email address policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies the order that the email address policies are evaluated. By default, every time that you add a new email address policy, the policy is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of email address policies that you've created. @@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md index 79703e4588..cf382d401a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example sets the event log level to High for the MSExchangeTransport\\SmtpR ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the event logging category for which you want to set the event logging level. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Level -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Level parameter specifies the log level for the specific event logging category. The valid values are: @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md index c8d43e777b..42f439b1a1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example changes the Help location for the Exchange admin center. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CommunityLinkDisplayEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CommunityURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ControlPanelFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ControlPanelFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ControlPanelHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ControlPanelHelpURL parameter specifies the URL where help for the Exchange admin center (EAC) is hosted. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeHelpAppOnline -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeHelpAppOnline specifies whether your organization uses the public help that's hosted by Microsoft. Valid values are: @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagementConsoleFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagementConsoleFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagementConsoleHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ManagementConsoleHelpURL parameter specifies the URL where help for the Exchange Management Console (EMC) is hosted. @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OWAHelpURL parameter specifies the URL for where help for the standard version of Outlook on the web is hosted. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OWALightHelpURL parameter specifies the URL for where help for the light version of Outlook on the web is hosted. @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivacyLinkDisplayEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivacyStatementURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md index fd7e59be88..a2e2cc0c75 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: lusassl-msft external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example blocks the features F1.1.1, F1.2.1, and F2.1.1 on the computer name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Approve -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Approve switch approves the feature specified by the FeatureID parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Block -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Block switch blocks the feature specified by the FeatureID parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FeatureID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FeatureID parameter specifies the feature you want to control. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md index d57443c90a..81bec36dcd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ This example removes an Exchange server from the Customer Experience Improvement ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomerFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CustomerFeedbackEnabled parameter specifies whether the Exchange server is enrolled in the Microsoft Customer Experience Improvement Program (CEIP). The CEIP collects anonymous information about how you use Exchange and problems that you might encounter. If you decide not to participate in the CEIP, the servers are opted-out automatically. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DataCollectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DataCollectionEnabled parameter specifies whether the EM Service collects and send diagnostic data to Microsoft using OCS. Valid values are: @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ErrorReportingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ErrorReportingEnabled parameter specifies whether error reporting is enabled. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternetWebProxy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternetWebProxy parameter specifies the web proxy server that the Exchange server uses to reach the internet. A valid value for this parameter is the URL of the web proxy server. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternetWebProxyBypassList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternetWebProxyBypassList parameter specifies a list of servers that bypass the web proxy server specified by the InternetWebProxy parameter. You identify the servers by their FQDN (for example, server01.contoso.com). @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsApplied -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE Do not use this parameter. The EM service uses this parameter to store and track mitigation status. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsBlocked -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MitigationsBlocked parameter specifies a list of mitigations that are blocked. The Mitigation IDs present in this list are not applied by EM service in its hourly run. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MitigationsEnabled parameter specifies whether the Exchange Emergency Mitigation service (EM service) automatically applies mitigations on the Exchange server. Valid values are: @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MonitoringGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MonitoringGroup parameter specifies how to add your Exchange servers to monitoring groups. You can add your servers to an existing group or create a monitoring group based on location or deployment, or to partition monitoring responsibility among your servers. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProductKey -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProductKey parameter specifies the server product key. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RingLevel parameter specifies the server ring level that's used by the Feature Flighting feature. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticConfigDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticConfigDomainController parameter specifies whether to configure a domain controller to be used by the server via Directory Service Access (DSAccess). @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticDomainControllers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticDomainControllers parameter specifies whether to configure a list of domain controllers to be used by the server via DSAccess. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticExcludedDomainControllers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticExcludedDomainControllers parameter specifies whether to exclude a list of domain controllers from being used by the server. @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticGlobalCatalogs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticGlobalCatalogs parameter specifies whether to configure a list of global catalogs to be used by the server via DSAccess. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md index 82fde1fc28..844d0b9c78 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ This example allows users to see the results of Unified Audit Logging. This exam ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the existing Exchange settings object that contains the Exchange settings that you want to configure. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClearHistory switch specifies that you want to clear the entries in the modification history for the Exchange setting object. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigName parameter specifies the available Exchange setting that you want to add, remove, or update in the Exchange settings object. Valid values for this parameter are determined by the configuration schema that was specified by the Name parameter on the New-ExchangeSettings cmdlet. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigPairs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigName parameter specifies the available Exchange setting that you want to add, remove, or update in the Exchange settings object. Valid values for this parameter are determined by the configuration schema that was specified by the Name parameter on the New-ExchangeSettings cmdlet. The syntax for a value is `=`. You can separate multiple values separated by commas. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigValue parameter specifies the value for the Exchange setting that you specified with the ConfigName parameter. The values are determined by the type of setting (a number, a timespan, $true or $false, etc.). @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateSettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CreateSettingsGroup switch specifies that you're creating an Exchange settings group, which is a group of related Exchange settings. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpirationDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExpirationDate parameter specifies the end date/time of the Exchange settings that are defined by the specified Exchange settings group. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GuidMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GuidMatch parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the GUID of the object (for example, the GUID of the mailbox database). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Reason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Reason parameter specifies a description for why the Exchange setting or settings group was created or modified. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveSetting switch specifies that you're removing an existing Exchange setting from an Exchange settings object. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveSettingsGroup switch specifies that you're removing an Exchange settings group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SettingsGroup parameter specifies an existing Exchange settings group that's used to create a new settings group, or modify an existing settings group. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateSetting switch specifies that you're updating an Exchange setting in an existing Exchange settings object. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateSettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateSettingsGroup switch specifies that you're modifying an Exchange settings group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Disable -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Disable switch specifies that the Exchange settings group is disabled. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisableGroup parameter specifies the name of the enabled Exchange settings group that you want to disable. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableGroup parameter specifies the name of the disabled Exchange settings group that you want to enable. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenericScopeName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenericScopeName parameter specifies the name of the scope. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenericScopeValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenericScopeValue parameter specifies the value of the scope specified by the GenericScopeName parameter. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupName parameter specifies the name of the Exchange settings group in group operations. For example: @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxVersion parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the version of the object (for example, the version of Exchange that's installed on the server). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MinVersion parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the version of the object (for example, the version of Exchange that's installed on the server). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NameMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NameMatch parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the name of the object (for example, the process name). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the priority of an Exchange settings group. The priority value for every group must be unique. A lower priority value indicates a higher priority. @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Scope parameter specifies the scope of the Exchange settings object. Valid values are: @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScopeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ScopeFilter parameter uses OPATH filter syntax to specify the scope of an Exchange settings group based. The syntax is `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"` (for example, `"ServerRole -like 'Mailbox*'"`). @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md index 2f88fa08ee..3af3c01013 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example enables the organization identifier. This enables federation for th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the federated organization identifier. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountNamespace -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AccountNamespace parameter specifies the federated domain to be used to establish the organization identifier with the Microsoft Federation Gateway. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DefaultDomain parameter specifies the federated domain used for delegation tokens issued by the Microsoft Federation Gateway for user accounts in the Exchange organization. If the DefaultDomain parameter isn't set, the primary SMTP domain for each user account is used in delegation tokens issued by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. Only a single domain or subdomain for the Exchange organization should be configured, and it applies to all delegation tokens issued for the Exchange organization, for example, contoso.com. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DelegationFederationTrust -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DelegationFederationTrust parameter specifies the identity of the federation trust to be used by the organization identifier. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the organization identifier is enabled. Valid values include $true or $false. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationContact -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationContact parameter specifies the SMTP address of the federation contact. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md index 9906bb2479..1f2bdd24ad 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Before you configure a federation trust to use the next certificate as the curre ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the federation trust being modified. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationUri parameter specifies the primary domain used for the federation organization identifier. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishFederationCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PublishFederationCertificate switch specifies the next certificate as the current certificate for the federation trust and publishes it to the Microsoft Federation Gateway. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL where WS-FederationMetadata is published by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a name for the federation trust. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshMetadata -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RefreshMetadata switch specifies that the metadata document and certificate is retrieved again from the Microsoft Federation Gateway. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of the X.509 certificate to be configured as the next certificate for the federation trust. After the certificate is deployed on all Exchange servers in the organization, you can use the PublishFederationCertificate switch to configure the trust to use this certificate. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md index 39b7e32309..6c5fbc08ee 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example configures a 10 MB message size limit on the existing Foreign conne ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Foreign connector that you want to modify. The Identity parameter can take any of the following values for the Foreign connector object: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names to which the Foreign connector sends messages. The complete syntax for entering each address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DropDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DropDirectory parameter specifies the name of the Drop directory used by this Foreign connector. All outbound messages sent to address spaces defined by this Foreign connector are put in the specified Drop directory. The location of the Drop directory for each Foreign connector is controlled by the following two items: @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DropDirectoryQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DropDirectoryQuota parameter specifies the maximum size of all message files in the Drop directory. When the specified value is reached, no new message files can be copied into the Drop directory until the existing messages are delivered and deleted. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the Foreign connector. The valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. When the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in the Exchange organization. When the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can be used only by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can pass through this Foreign connector. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the Foreign connector. @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RelayDsnRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RelayDsnRequired parameter specifies whether a Relay delivery status notification (DSN) is required by the Foreign connector when messages are written to the Drop directory. The valid input values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the names of the Mailbox servers that use this Foreign connector. Having a single Foreign connector homed on multiple Mailbox servers running the Transport service provides fault tolerance and high availability if one of the servers fails. The default value of this parameter is the name of the Mailbox server on which this Foreign connector was first installed. @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md index d9a3a5221e..bdbf2666e0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ This example sets the ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter to C:\\SMTP Protocol Logs ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\AgentLog. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the AgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AntispamAgentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AntispamAgentsEnabled parameter specifies whether anti-spam agents are installed on the server specified with the Identity parameter. The default value is $false for the Front End Transport service. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the connectivity log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the connectivity log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all connectivity logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 1000 MB. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each connectivity log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogPath parameter specifies the default connectivity log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\Connectivity. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables connectivity logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the ConnectivityLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the DNS log is enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the DNS log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all DNS logs in the DNS log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 100 MB. @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each DNS log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogPath parameter specifies the DNS log directory location. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates no location is configured. If you enable DNS logging, you need to specify a local file path for the DNS log files by using this parameter. If the path contains spaces, enclose the entire path value in quotation marks ("). @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more Domain Name System (DNS) servers that Exchange uses for external DNS lookups. When the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations outside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the external network adapter specified by the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for external Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the ExternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of destinations that exist outside the Exchange organization. The concept of an external network adapter and an internal network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and external DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for external DNS lookups. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when querying external DNS servers. The valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, and UseUdpOnly. The default value is Any. @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of external DNS servers that the server queries when resolving a remote domain. You must separate IP addresses by using commas. The default value is an empty list ({}). @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddress parameter specifies the IP address used in the Received message header field for every message that travels through the Front End Transport service. The IP address in the Received header field is used for hop count and routing loop detection. The IP address specified by the ExternalIPAddress parameter overrides the external network adapter's actual IP address. Typically, you would want to set the value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter to match the value of your domain's public MX record. The default value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter is blank. This means the actual IP address of the external network adapter is used in the Received header field. @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more DNS servers that Exchange uses for internal DNS lookups. When the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations inside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the internal network adapter specified by the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for internal Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the InternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of servers that exist inside the Exchange organization. The concept of an internal network adapter and an external network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and internal DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for internal DNS lookups. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when you query internal DNS servers. Valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, or UseUdpOnly. @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of DNS servers that should be used when resolving a domain name. DNS servers are specified by IP address and are separated by commas. The default value is any empty list ({}). @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel parameter enables or disables SMTP protocol logging on the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector In the Front End Transport service. Valid values are: @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionRatePerMinute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter specifies the maximum rate that connections are allowed to be opened with the transport service. If many connections are attempted with the transport service at the same time, the MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter limits the rate that the connections are opened so that the server's resources aren't overwhelmed. The default value is 1200 connections per minute. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Transport service on the server. Log files that are older than the specified value are automaticallydeleted. @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Front End Transport service on the server. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -794,7 +794,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Front End Transport service on the server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for all Receive connectors in the Front End Transport service on the server. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpReceive. @@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum routing table log age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the routing table log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogPath parameter specifies the directory location where routing table log files should be stored. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\Routing. Setting this parameter to $null disables routing table logging. @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file that's shared by all Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. Log files that are older than the specified value are deleted. @@ -942,7 +942,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory that's shared by all Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file that's shared by all the Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for all Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpSend. @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryCount parameter specifies the maximum number of immediate connection retries attempted when the server encounters a connection failure with a remote server. The default value is 6. The valid input range for this parameter is from 0 through 15. When the value of this parameter is set to 0, the server doesn't immediately attempt to retry an unsuccessful connection. @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter controls the connection interval between each connection attempt specified by the TransientFailureRetryCount parameter. For the Front End Transport service, the default value of the TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter is 5 minutes. @@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md index 1b6156bcc7..427add54fe 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example assigns a new name, GALwithNewName, to the GAL with the GUID 96d0c5 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the global address list that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the GAL. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies an OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md index 0d12511a23..3e23d3c7be 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example specifies that the group Human Resources is a hierarchical group an ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsHierarchicalGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IsHierarchicalGroup parameter specifies whether the group is part of a hierarchical address book. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A group must have at least one owner. If you don't use this parameter to specify the owner when you create the group, the user account that created the group is the owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SeniorityIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SeniorityIndex parameter specifies the order in which this group displays in a hierarchical address book. A group with a value of 2 displays higher in an address book than a group with a value of 1. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Universal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Universal switch changes the scope of the group from Global or DomainLocal to Universal. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md index 6e76762288..020664f802 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example specifies that the hybrid deployment uses a defined TLS certificate ### -ClientAccessServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Domains parameter specifies the domain namespaces used in the hybrid deployment. These domains must be configured as accepted domains in either on-premises Exchange or Exchange Online. The domains are used in configuring the organization relationships and Send and Receive connectors used by the hybrid configuration. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddresses parameter is a legacy parameter that specifies the publicly accessible inbound IP address of Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Hub Transport servers. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Features -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Features parameter specifies the features that are enabled for the hybrid configuration. Valid values are: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesSmartHost -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OnPremisesSmartHost parameter specifies the FQDN of the on-premises Exchange Mailbox server used for secure mail transport between on-premises Exchange and Exchange Online. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceivingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the outbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the inbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceInstance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is meaningful only in Office 365 operated by 21Vianet in China. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. Valid syntax for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`: @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EdgeTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdgeTransportServers parameter specifies the Edge Transport servers that are configured to support the hybrid deployment features. The Edge Transport server must be externally accessible from the Internet on port 25. The accepted values for the EdgeTransportServers parameter are either the full or short computer name of an Edge Transport server, for example, either edge.corp.contoso.com or EDGE. Separate server names with a comma if defining more than one Edge Transport server. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md index 98ff7468b6..1d6d73bd21 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example configures connection filtering to use the IP Allow list on message ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the IP Allow list is used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, the IP Allow list is used for content filtering. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Allow list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by the IP Allow list. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Allow list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by the IP Allow list. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md index af75586dea..ef60d3134a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example sets the priority to 1 for the existing IP Allow list provider name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Allow list provider that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Allow list provider. For example: @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnyMatch parameter specifies whether any response by the allow list provider is treated as a match. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. When this parameter is set to $true, and connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the allow list provider, any response code returned by the allow list provider causes connection filtering to allow messages from that source. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BitmaskMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BitmaskMatch parameter specifies the bit mask status code that's returned by the allow list provider. Use this parameter if the allow list provider returns bitmask responses. Valid input for this parameter is a single IP address in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Allow list provider according to the priority set for this IP Allow list provider configuration. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Allow list provider according to the priority set for this IP Allow list provider configuration. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IPAddressesMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IPAddressesMatch parameter specifies the IP address status codes that are returned by the allow list provider. Use this parameter if the allow list provider returns IP address or A record responses. Valid input for this parameter one or more IP addresses in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LookupDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LookupDomain parameter specifies the host name that's required to use the allow list provider. Connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the host name value that you specify. An example value is allowlist.spamservice.com. The actual value you need to use is provided by the allow list provider. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the IP Allow list provider. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order that the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Allow list providers that you've configured. By default, every time that you add a new IP Allow list provider, the entry is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of IP Allow list providers you've configured. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md index 02de75f25d..b302367695 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example configures connection filtering to use IP Allow list providers on m ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether IP Allow list providers are used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. The default value is $true. By default, IP Allow list providers are used for content filtering. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Allow list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by IP Allow list providers. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Allow list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by IP Allow list providers. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md index 07b5a80820..52a84ea0f0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example configures connection filtering to use the IP Block list on message ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the IP Block list is used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, the IP Block list is used for content filtering. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Block list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by the IP Block list. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Block list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by the IP Block list. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MachineEntryRejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MachineEntryRejectionResponse parameter specifies customized text in the non-delivery report (NDR) for messages that are blocked by connection filtering due to IP addresses in the IP Block list that were added by sender reputation. The value can't exceed 240 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in double quotation marks ("). @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticEntryRejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticEntryRejectionResponse parameter specifies a customized text in the NDR for messages that are blocked by connection filtering due to IP addresses in the IP Block list. The value can't exceed 240 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in double quotation marks ("). @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md index 7768c0863f..cbfed7d8a3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example sets the priority value to 1 for the IP Block list provider named C ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Block list provider that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Block list provider. For example: @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnyMatch parameter specifies whether any response by the block list provider is treated as a match. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. When this parameter is set to $true and connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the block list provider, any response code returned by the block list provider causes connection filtering to block messages from that source. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BitmaskMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BitmaskMatch parameter specifies the bit mask status code that's returned by the block list provider. Use this parameter if the block list provider returns bitmask responses. Valid input for this parameter is a single IP address in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the connection filtering uses this IP Block list provider. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, connection filtering uses new IP Block list providers that you create. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IPAddressesMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IPAddressesMatch parameter specifies the IP address status codes that are returned by the block list provider. Use this parameter if the block list provider returns IP address or A record responses. Valid input for this parameter one or more IP addresses in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LookupDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LookupDomain parameter specifies the host name that's required to use the block list provider. Connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the host name value that you specify. An example value is blocklist.spamservice.com. The actual value you need to use is provided by the block list provider. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the IP Block list provider. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order that the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Block list providers. A lower priority integer value indicates a higher priority. By default, every time that you add a new IP Block list provider, the entry is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of IP Block list provider services that you have configured. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectionResponse parameter specifies the text that you want to include in the SMTP rejection response when messages are blocked by connection filtering. The argument can't exceed 240 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md index 6ff657f659..2fcbad285d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example makes the following changes to the list of bypassed recipients: ### -BypassedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedRecipients parameter specifies the email addresses of internal recipients that are exempted from filtering by IP Block list providers. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether IP Block list providers are used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. The default value is $true. By default, IP Block list providers are used for content filtering. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Block list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by IP Bock list providers. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Block list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by IP Block list providers. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md index 31c494d89b..5c112c0342 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClientAccessServerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EDiscoverySuperUserEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EDiscoverySuperUserEnabled parameter specifies whether members of the Discovery Management role group can access IRM-protected messages in a discovery mailbox that were returned by a discovery search. Valid values are: @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalLicensingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalLicensingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note**: In Exchange Online, this parameter affects both internal and external messages. In on-premises Exchange, this parameter only affects internal messages. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalReportDecryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalReportDecryptionEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable journal report decryption. Valid values are: @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LicensingLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LicensingLocation parameter specifies the RMS licensing URLs. You can specify multiple URL values separated by commas. @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshServerCertificates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SearchEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable searching of IRM-encrypted messages in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App). Valid values are: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportDecryptionSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TransportDecryptionSetting parameter specifies the transport decryption configuration. Valid values are: @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md index c596ae4a64..7dbf537398 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ This example specifies the certificate that contains mail.contoso.com is used to ### -AuthenticatedConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthenticatedConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the period of time to wait before closing an idle authenticated connection. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Banner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Banner parameter specifies the text string that's displayed to connecting IMAP4 clients. The default value is: The Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 service is ready. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarItemRetrievalOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarItemRetrievalOption parameter specifies how calendar items are presented to IMAP4 clients. Valid values are: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExactRFC822Size -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableExactRFC822Size parameter specifies how message sizes are presented to IMAP4 clients. Valid values are: @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableGSSAPIAndNTLMAuth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableGSSAPIAndNTLMAuth parameter specifies whether connections can use Integrated Windows authentication (NTLM) using the Generic Security Services application programming interface (GSSAPI). This setting applies to connections where Transport Layer Security (TLS) is disabled. Valid values are: @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnforceCertificateErrors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnforceCertificateErrors parameter specifies whether to enforce valid Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate validation failures. Valid values are: @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionPolicy parameter specifies how Extended Protection for Authentication is used. Valid values are: @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalConnectionSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalConnectionSettings parameter specifies the host name, port, and encryption method that's used by external IMAP4 clients (IMAP4 connections from outside your corporate network). @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalConnectionSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalConnectionSettings parameter specifies the host name, port, and encryption method that's used by internal IMAP4 clients (IMAP4 connections from inside your corporate network). This setting is also used when a IMAP4 connection is forwarded to another Exchange server that's running the Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 service. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFileLocation parameter specifies the location for the IMAP4 protocol log files. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%Logging\\Imap4. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileRollOverSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFileRollOverSettings parameter specifies how frequently IMAP4 protocol logging creates a new log file. Valid values are: @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LoginType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LoginType parameter specifies the authentication method for IMAP4 connections. Valid values are: @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPerFileSizeQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogPerFileSizeQuota parameter specifies the maximum size of a IMAP4 protocol log file. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCommandSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxCommandSize parameter specifies the maximum size in bytes of a single IMAP4 command. Valid values are from 1024 through 16384. The default value is 10240. @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionFromSingleIP -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionFromSingleIP parameter specifies the maximum number of IMAP4 connections that are accepted by the Exchange server from a single IP address. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 2147483647. @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of IMAP4 connections that are accepted by the Exchange server. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 2147483647. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionsPerUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionsPerUser parameter specifies the maximum number of IMAP4 connections that are allowed for each user. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 16. @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRetrievalMimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRetrievalMimeFormat parameter specifies the MIME encoding of messages. Valid values are: @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaServerUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaServerUrl parameter specifies the URL that's used to retrieve calendar information for instances of custom Outlook on the web calendar items. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreAuthenticatedConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreAuthenticatedConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the period of time to wait before closing an idle IMAP4 connection that isn't authenticated. @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLogEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable protocol logging for IMAP4. Valid values are: @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProxyTargetPort -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProxyTargetPort parameter specifies the port on the Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 Backend service that listens for client connections that are proxied from the Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 service. The default value is 1993. @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowHiddenFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowHiddenFoldersEnabled parameter specifies whether hidden mailbox folders are visible. Valid values are: @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SSLBindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SSLBindings parameter specifies the IP address and TCP port that's used for IMAP4 connection that's always encrypted by SSL/TLS. This parameter uses the syntax `IPv4OrIPv6Address:Port`. @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuppressReadReceipt parameter specifies whether to stop duplicate read receipts from being sent to IMAP4 clients that have the Send read receipts for messages I send setting configured in their IMAP4 email program. Valid values are: @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnencryptedOrTLSBindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UnencryptedOrTLSBindings parameter specifies the IP address and TCP port that's used for unencrypted IMAP4 connections, or IMAP4 connections that are encrypted by using opportunistic TLS (STARTTLS) after the initial unencrypted protocol handshake. This parameter uses the syntax `IPv4OrIPv6Address:Port`. @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X509CertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X509CertificateName parameter specifies the certificate that's used for encrypting IMAP4 client connections. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md index a9d14c5d20..88e296d6ef 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ This example modifies the action of the existing Inbox rule ProjectContoso. The ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Inbox rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob switch hides a warning message when you use Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App) or Exchange PowerShell to modify Inbox rules. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified category to messages. A valid value is any text value that you want to define as a category. You can specify multiple categories separated by commas. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplySystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplySystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified system category to messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CopyToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that copies messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteSystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteSystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that deletes the specified system category from messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that sends messages to the Deleted Items folder. Valid values are: @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFlaggedForAction parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFrom parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasAttachment parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasClassification parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -765,7 +765,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithImportance parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -925,7 +925,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithSensitivity parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: @@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FlaggedForAction parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardAsAttachmentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardAsAttachmentTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient as an attachment. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1086,7 +1086,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -From -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The From parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -1115,7 +1115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachment parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -1164,7 +1164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasClassification parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -1184,7 +1184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the Inbox rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkAsRead -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkAsRead parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages as read. Valid values are: @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkImportance parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages with the specified importance flag. Valid values are: @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypeMatches parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that moves messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1393,7 +1393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -1416,7 +1416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1439,7 +1439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the Inbox rule. The maximum length is 512 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1457,7 +1457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PinMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PinMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that pins messages to the top of the Inbox. Valid values are: @@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies a priority for the Inbox rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, @@ -1496,7 +1496,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -1518,7 +1518,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -1540,7 +1540,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RedirectTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that redirects the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1593,7 +1593,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendTextMessageNotificationTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentOnlyToMe parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified recipients. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StopProcessingRules -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StopProcessingRules parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that stops processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. Valid values are:If set to $true, the StopProcessingRules parameter instructs Exchange to stop processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. @@ -1710,7 +1710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithImportance parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -1836,7 +1836,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -1868,7 +1868,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithSensitivity parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md index 54ac46f17a..a1f7a1c74d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example disables the Intra-Organization connector named "MainCloudConnector ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the Intra-Organization connector that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the connector. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiscoveryEndpoint parameter specifies the externally accessible URL used for the Autodiscover service for the domain configured in the IntraOrganization Connector. This parameter is automatically populated with the TargetAutodiscoverEpr value from the Get-FederationInformation cmdlet for the defined domain. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter enables or disabled the Intra-organization connector. The valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAddressDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetAddressDomains parameter specifies the domain namespaces to be used in the Intra-Organization connector. The domains must have valid Autodiscover endpoints defined in their organizations. The domains and their associated Autodiscover endpoints are used by the Intra-Organization connector for feature and service connectivity. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md index f0a36d4384..05448cdeb4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,6 +47,8 @@ Set-JournalRule "Consolidated Messenger" -JournalEmailAddress "ArchiveMailbox@co This example modifies the journal email address to which journal reports are sent by the existing journal rule Consolidated Messenger. +The Identity parameter is positional, which means you can use it without the -Identity label in the supported location in the command (in this case, first). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). + ### Example 2 ```powershell Get-JournalRule | Set-JournalRule -JournalEmailAddress "Archive Mailbox" @@ -58,12 +60,10 @@ This example modifies the journal email address for all journal rules. The Get-J ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name or GUID of the rule you want to modify. -The Identity parameter is a positional parameter. When using positional parameters in a command, you can omit the parameter label. - ```yaml Type: RuleIdParameter Parameter Sets: (All) @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalEmailAddress parameter specifies a journal recipient. Journal reports for the specified rule are sent to the journal recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the journal rule. The name of the rule can be up to 64 characters. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipient parameter specifies the SMTP address of a mailbox, contact, or distribution group to journal. If you specify a distribution group, all recipients in that distribution group are journaled. All messages sent to or received from a recipient are journaled. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Scope parameter specifies the scope of email messages to which the journal rule is applied. You can use the following values: @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md index 35488447ff..2b06f8b281 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ This example sets John Rodman's external email address to john@contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail contact that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail contact. For example: @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail contact. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center (EAC) and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mail contact. Although messages sent on behalf of the mail contact clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the mail contact, not the sender. @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRecipientPerMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -1195,7 +1195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageFormat parameter specifies the message format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -1223,7 +1223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1254,7 +1254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail contact. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1356,7 +1356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1391,7 +1391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePicture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1450,7 +1450,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -1493,7 +1493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1513,7 +1513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryDialPlan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -1557,7 +1557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseMapiRichTextFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UseMapiRichTextFormat parameter specifies what to do with messages that are sent to the mail user or mail contact in MAPI rich text format, also known as Outlook Rich Text or Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF). Valid values are: @@ -1637,7 +1637,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -1698,7 +1698,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1716,7 +1716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md index 08ae62604e..1b5c034778 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ This example removes the secondary email address MyPublicFolder@fabrikam.com fro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path using the format \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Contacts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Contacts parameter specifies the contacts for the public folder. Contacts are persons about whom you can save several types of information, such as addresses, telephone numbers, and web page URLs. @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliverToMailboxAndForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeliverToMailboxAndForward parameter specifies the message delivery behavior when a forwarding address is specified by the ForwardingAddress or ForwardingSmtpAddress parameters. Valid values are: @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the Public Folder Proxy object. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, address lists, and Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddressPolicyEnabled parameter specifies whether to apply email address policies to this recipient. Valid values are: @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EntryId parameter specifies the EntryID value for the public folder. You use this parameter to correct an existing EntryID that points to a folder that can't be found. @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -946,7 +946,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies an email address outside the organization. @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingAddress parameter specifies a forwarding address for messages that are sent to this public folder. A valid value for this parameter is a recipient in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this public folder. Although messages sent on behalf of the mail user clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the public folder, not the sender. @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreMissingFolderLink -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreMissingFolderLink parameter specifies whether to exclude the mail-enabled public folder from a specific validation check that's used during a public folder migration. Valid values are: @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the public folder. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the public folder. @@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the public folder. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1281,7 +1281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesObjectId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OnPremisesObjectId parameter specifies the ObjectID (GUID) value of the mail-enabled public folder from the on-premises environment. @@ -1299,7 +1299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. You can't use the EmailAddresses and PrimarySmtpAddress parameters in the same command. @@ -1362,7 +1362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1397,7 +1397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1432,7 +1432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1469,7 +1469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -1539,7 +1539,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -1583,7 +1583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md index 8ecd9e7617..fcdc2c27d6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ This example modifies the external email address for the mail user named John Wo ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail user that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail user. For example: @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1092,7 +1092,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1159,7 +1159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1177,7 +1177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1292,7 +1292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1346,7 +1346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1400,7 +1400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1418,7 +1418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1508,7 +1508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1570,7 +1570,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail user. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, address lists, and Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1608,7 +1608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -1647,7 +1647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1692,7 +1692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1756,7 +1756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1828,7 +1828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1852,7 +1852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1876,7 +1876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -1918,7 +1918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1936,7 +1936,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mail user. Although messages sent on behalf of the mail user clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `, replies to these messages are delivered to the mail user, not the sender. @@ -1973,7 +1973,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -2014,7 +2014,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2039,7 +2039,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -2099,7 +2099,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -2147,7 +2147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2170,7 +2170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -2196,7 +2196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the mail user. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -2227,7 +2227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the mail user. @@ -2258,7 +2258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -2285,7 +2285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageFormat parameter specifies the message format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -2333,7 +2333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -2387,7 +2387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail user. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2431,7 +2431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2477,7 +2477,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientLimits -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2501,7 +2501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2535,7 +2535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2569,7 +2569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -2604,7 +2604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -2639,7 +2639,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePicture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2840,7 +2840,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2862,7 +2862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -2908,7 +2908,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2928,7 +2928,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE Online Protection This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2948,7 +2948,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryDialPlan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2968,7 +2968,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -2992,7 +2992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -3016,7 +3016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDualWrite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange 2016 or later. @@ -3036,7 +3036,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3088,7 +3088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseMapiRichTextFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UseMapiRichTextFormat parameter specifies what to do with messages that are sent to the mail user or mail contact in MAPI rich text format, also known as Outlook Rich Text or Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF). Valid values are: @@ -3112,7 +3112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -3133,7 +3133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UserCertificate parameter specifies the digital certificate used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -3151,7 +3151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3171,7 +3171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserSMimeCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UserSMimeCertificate parameter specifies the S/MIME certificate that's used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -3189,7 +3189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -3207,7 +3207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md index 0af9d1bc47..0ecd97ae8d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example removes the delay hold that's applied to Asraf' ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1291,7 +1291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressBookPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressBookPolicy parameter specifies the address book policy that's applied to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address book policy. For example: @@ -1375,7 +1375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -1411,7 +1411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AntispamBypassEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1434,7 +1434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyMandatoryProperties -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyMandatoryProperties switch specifies whether to update the msExchVersion attribute of the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1509,7 +1509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveName parameter specifies the name of the archive mailbox. This is the name displayed to users in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1583,7 +1583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1615,7 +1615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveStatus -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This cmdlet is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1635,7 +1635,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1667,7 +1667,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttributesToClear -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1687,7 +1687,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditAdmin -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditAdmin parameter specifies the mailbox operations to log for administrators as part of mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -1732,7 +1732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditDelegate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditDelegate parameter specifies the mailbox operations to log for delegate users as part of mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable mailbox audit logging for the mailbox. If auditing is enabled, actions specified in the AuditAdmin, AuditDelegate, and AuditOwner parameters are logged. Valid values are: @@ -1797,7 +1797,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1821,7 +1821,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLogAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditLogAgeLimit parameter specifies the maximum age of audit log entries for the mailbox. Log entries older than the specified value are removed. The default value is 90 days. @@ -1843,7 +1843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditOwner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditOwner parameter specifies the mailbox operations to log for mailbox owners as part of mailbox audit logging. Valid values include: @@ -1886,7 +1886,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1910,7 +1910,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -1943,7 +1943,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarLoggingQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1979,7 +1979,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CalendarRepairDisabled parameter specifies whether to prevent calendar items in the mailbox from being repaired by the Calendar Repair Assistant. Valid values are: @@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarVersionStoreDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CalendarVersionStoreDisabled parameter specifies whether to prevent calendar changes in the mailbox from being logged. Valid values are: @@ -2043,7 +2043,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClientExtensions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2065,7 +2065,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -2086,7 +2086,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2109,7 +2109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2127,7 +2127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2145,7 +2145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2163,7 +2163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2181,7 +2181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2199,7 +2199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2217,7 +2217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2253,7 +2253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2271,7 +2271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2289,7 +2289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2307,7 +2307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2325,7 +2325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2343,7 +2343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2361,7 +2361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2379,7 +2379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2457,7 +2457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderMailbox parameter assigns a specific public folder mailbox to the user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the public folder mailbox. For example: @@ -2484,7 +2484,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliverToMailboxAndForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeliverToMailboxAndForward parameter specifies the message delivery behavior when a forwarding address is specified by the ForwardingAddress or ForwardingSmtpAddress parameters. Valid values are: @@ -2507,7 +2507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableThrottling -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mailbox. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2548,7 +2548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2568,7 +2568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DowngradeHighPriorityMessagesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2591,7 +2591,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DumpsterMessagesPerFolderCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2613,7 +2613,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DumpsterMessagesPerFolderCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2678,7 +2678,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -2717,7 +2717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2740,7 +2740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableRoomMailboxAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2767,7 +2767,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDateForRetentionHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDateForRetentionHold parameter specifies the end date for retention hold for messaging records management (MRM). To use this parameter, you need to set the RetentionHoldEnabled parameter to the value $true. @@ -2855,7 +2855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedPropertiesCountQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2875,7 +2875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2899,7 +2899,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2923,7 +2923,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2947,7 +2947,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2971,7 +2971,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2995,7 +2995,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalOofOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalOofOptions parameter specifies the automatic replies or Out of Office (also known OOF) message options that are available for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -3016,7 +3016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyChildrenCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3038,7 +3038,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyChildrenCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3060,7 +3060,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyDepthReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3082,7 +3082,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyDepthWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3104,7 +3104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FoldersCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3126,7 +3126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FoldersCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3148,7 +3148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -3168,7 +3168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingAddress parameter specifies a forwarding address in your organization for messages that are sent to this mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the internal recipient. For example: @@ -3202,7 +3202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingSmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingSmtpAddress parameter specifies a forwarding SMTP address for messages that are sent to this mailbox. Typically, you use this parameter to specify external email addresses that aren't validated. @@ -3229,7 +3229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GMGen -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3251,7 +3251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mailbox. Although messages send on behalf of the mailbox clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the mailbox, not the sender. @@ -3308,7 +3308,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -3329,7 +3329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3354,7 +3354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImListMigrationCompleted -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3383,7 +3383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -3431,7 +3431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter prevents users from accessing the public folder hierarchy on this public folder mailbox. For load-balancing purposes, users are equally distributed across public folder mailboxes by default. When this parameter is set on a public folder mailbox, that mailbox isn't included in this automatic load-balancing and can't be accessed by users to retrieve the public folder hierarchy. However, if an administrator has set the DefaultPublicFolderMailbox property on a user mailbox to a specific public folder mailbox, the user can still access the specified public folder mailbox even if the IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter is set for that public folder mailbox. @@ -3451,7 +3451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsHierarchyReady -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3471,7 +3471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsHierarchySyncEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3491,7 +3491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -3545,7 +3545,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Languages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Languages parameter specifies the language preferences for this mailbox, in order of preference. Several Exchange components display information to a mailbox user in the preferred language, if that language is supported. Some of those components include quota messages, non-delivery reports (NDRs), the Outlook on the web user interface, and Unified Messaging (UM) voice prompts. @@ -3569,7 +3569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3591,7 +3591,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3611,7 +3611,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedMasterAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3636,7 +3636,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LitigationHoldDate parameter specifies the date that the mailbox is placed on litigation hold. The parameter is populated automatically when you place a mailbox on litigation hold. The date you specify can be used for informational or reporting purposes. @@ -3656,7 +3656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LitigationHoldDuration parameter specifies how long mailbox items are held if the mailbox is placed on litigation hold. The duration is calculated from the date a mailbox item is received or created. @@ -3676,7 +3676,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LitigationHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether to place the mailbox on litigation hold. Valid values are: @@ -3701,7 +3701,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldOwner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LitigationHoldOwner parameter specifies the user who placed the mailbox on litigation hold. If you don't use this parameter when you place the mailbox on litigation hold, the value is populated automatically. If you use this parameter when you place the mailbox on litigation hold, you can specify a text value. If the value contains spaces, include the value in quotation marks ("). You can use this value for informational and reporting purposes. @@ -3719,7 +3719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMessagesPerFolderCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is an available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3743,7 +3743,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMessagesPerFolderCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is an available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3791,7 +3791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -3814,7 +3814,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -3884,7 +3884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Management -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3906,7 +3906,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxBlockedSenders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3926,7 +3926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the mailbox. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -3963,7 +3963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSafeSenders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3983,7 +3983,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the mailbox. @@ -4020,7 +4020,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageCopyForSendOnBehalfEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: Previously, this parameter was available only for shared mailboxes. In Exchange Online or Exchange 2016 CU6 or later, this parameter is also available for user mailboxes. This parameter is not available for linked user mailboxes. @@ -4045,7 +4045,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageCopyForSentAsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: Previously, this parameter was available only for shared mailboxes. In Exchange Online or Exchange 2016 CU6 or later, this parameter is also available for user mailboxes. This parameter is not available for linked user mailboxes. @@ -4095,7 +4095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTracking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4117,7 +4117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingReadStatusEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTrackingReadStatusEnabled parameter specifies whether to include detailed information in delivery reports for messages sent to the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -4158,7 +4158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Migration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4178,7 +4178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -4209,7 +4209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -4232,7 +4232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mailbox. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -4252,7 +4252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4298,7 +4298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OABGen -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4320,7 +4320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Office -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Office parameter specifies the user's physical office name or number. @@ -4338,7 +4338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4364,7 +4364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OldPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4390,7 +4390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OMEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4410,7 +4410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OMEncryptionStore -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Password parameter resets the password of the user account that's associated with the mailbox to the value you specify. To use this parameter on a mailbox other than your own, consider the following options: @@ -4457,7 +4457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4481,7 +4481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProhibitSendQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send new messages, and the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -4515,7 +4515,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProhibitSendReceiveQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send or receive new messages. Messages sent to the mailbox are returned to the sender with a descriptive error message. This value effectively determines the maximum size of the mailbox. @@ -4569,7 +4569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PstProvider -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4589,7 +4589,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolder switch is required to modify public folder mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -4609,7 +4609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryBaseDN -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4653,7 +4653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientLimits -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientLimits parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients allowed in messages sent by the mailbox. @@ -4675,7 +4675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4711,7 +4711,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4747,7 +4747,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -4782,7 +4782,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -4817,7 +4817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -4854,7 +4854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteRecipientType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4965,7 +4965,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveManagedFolderAndPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5009,7 +5009,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePicture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5031,7 +5031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5053,7 +5053,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -5074,7 +5074,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5099,7 +5099,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceCapacity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceCapacity parameter specifies the capacity of the resource mailbox. For example, you can use this parameter to identify the number of seats in a conference room (room mailbox) or in a vehicle (equipment mailbox). A valid value is an integer. @@ -5117,7 +5117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceCustom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceCustom parameter specifies one or more custom resource properties to add to the resource mailbox. You can use this parameter only on resource mailboxes. @@ -5143,7 +5143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainDeletedItemsFor -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetainDeletedItemsFor parameter specifies the length of time to keep soft-deleted items for the mailbox. Soft-deleted items are items that have been deleted by using any of these methods: @@ -5177,7 +5177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainDeletedItemsUntilBackup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5204,7 +5204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RetentionComment parameter specifies a comment that's displayed in Outlook regarding the user's retention hold status. @@ -5228,7 +5228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether the mailbox is placed on retention hold. Placing the mailbox on retention hold temporarily suspends the processing of retention policies or managed folder mailbox policies for the mailbox (for example, when the user is on vacation). Valid values are: @@ -5251,7 +5251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionPolicy parameter specifies the retention policy that you want applied to this mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -5277,7 +5277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RetentionUrl parameter specifies the URL or an external web page with additional details about the organization's messaging retention policies. @@ -5297,7 +5297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleAssignmentPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoleAssignmentPolicy parameter specifies the role assignment policy that's assigned to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the role assignment policy. For example: @@ -5323,7 +5323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomMailboxPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5359,7 +5359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RulesQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RulesQuota parameter specifies the limit for the size of Inbox rules for the mailbox. When you enter a value, qualify the value with one of the following: @@ -5390,7 +5390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5430,7 +5430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5454,7 +5454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5476,7 +5476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLJunkEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5500,7 +5500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLJunkThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5522,7 +5522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5548,7 +5548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5570,7 +5570,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5594,7 +5594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5616,7 +5616,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5636,7 +5636,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryDialPlan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5656,7 +5656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -5680,7 +5680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SharingPolicy parameter specifies the sharing policy that's assigned to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sharing policy. For example: @@ -5704,7 +5704,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -5728,7 +5728,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SingleItemRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SingleItemRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether to prevent the Recoverable Items folder from being purged. Valid values are: @@ -5749,7 +5749,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDualWrite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange @@ -5769,7 +5769,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDateForRetentionHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDateForRetentionHold parameter specifies the start date for the retention hold that's placed on the mailbox. @@ -5791,7 +5791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StsRefreshTokensValidFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -5809,7 +5809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemMessageSizeShutoffQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5829,7 +5829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemMessageSizeWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5849,7 +5849,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5875,7 +5875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Type parameter specifies the mailbox type for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -5900,7 +5900,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDataStorage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5922,7 +5922,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5954,7 +5954,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMGrammar -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5996,7 +5996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDatabaseQuotaDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseDatabaseQuotaDefaults parameter specifies whether applicable quotas for the mailbox are determined by the quota values on the mailbox or the corresponding quota values on the mailbox database (not all mailbox quotas are configurable on the mailbox database). Valid values are: @@ -6026,7 +6026,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDatabaseRetentionDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -6059,7 +6059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserCertificate parameter specifies the digital certificate used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -6077,7 +6077,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -6097,7 +6097,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserSMimeCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserSMimeCertificate parameter specifies the S/MIME certificate that's used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -6115,7 +6115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -6133,7 +6133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md index 727665ecc5..e902549d46 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example removes the bypass association for the Svc-MyApplication account. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies a user or computer account to be bypassed from mailbox audit logging. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditBypassEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditBypassEnabled parameter specifies whether audit bypass is enabled for the user or computer. Valid values include the following: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md index 8e5570733c..eae06dedc4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example configures Automatic Replies for Tony's mailbox to be sent, specifi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDeclineFutureRequestsWhenOOF -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoReplyState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoReplyState parameter specifies whether the mailbox is enabled for Automatic Replies. Valid values are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateOOFEvent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeclineAllEventsForScheduledOOF -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeclineEventsForScheduledOOF -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeclineMeetingMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndTime parameter specifies the end date and time that Automatic Replies are sent for the mailbox. You use this parameter only when the AutoReplyState parameter is set to Scheduled, and the value of this parameter is meaningful only when AutoReplyState is Scheduled. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EventsToDeleteIDs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAudience -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalAudience parameter specifies whether Automatic Replies are sent to external senders. Valid values are: @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalMessage parameter specifies the Automatic Replies message that's sent to external senders or senders outside the organization. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalMessage parameter specifies the Automatic Replies message that's sent to internal senders or senders within the organization. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OOFEventSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartTime parameter specifies the start date and time that Automatic Replies are sent for the specified mailbox. You use this parameter only when the AutoReplyState parameter is set to Scheduled, and the value of this parameter is meaningful only when AutoReplyState is Scheduled. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md index d0f4c94bb5..3c37bb9ac5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ This example sets the working day's starting hour to 7 A.M. for the calendar of ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgendaMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConversationalSchedulingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConversationalSchedulingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable conversational scheduling. Valid values are: @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DailyAgendaMailSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultMeetingDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultReminderTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultReminderTime parameter specifies the length of time before a meeting or appointment when the reminder is first displayed. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstWeekOfYear -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FirstWeekOfYear parameter specifies the first week of the year. Valid values are: @@ -912,7 +912,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemindersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemindersEnabled parameter enables or disables reminders for calendar items. Valid values are: @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReminderSoundEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReminderSoundEnabled parameter specifies whether a sound is played along with the reminder. Valid values are: @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowWeekNumbers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowWeekNumbers parameter specifies whether the week number is displayed in the Outlook on the web calendar. Valid values are: @@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipAgendaMailOnFreeDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeIncrement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeIncrement parameter specifies the scale that the Outlook on the web calendar uses to show time. Valid values are: @@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseBrightCalendarColorThemeInOwa -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseBrightCalendarColorThemeInOwa parameter specifies whether to use light colors or bright colors for the calendar in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WeekStartDay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WeekStartDay parameter specifies the first day of the week. Valid values are: @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1248,7 +1248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkDays parameter specifies the work days in the calendar. Valid values are: @@ -1280,7 +1280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkingHoursEndTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkingHoursEndTime parameter specifies the time that the work day ends. @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkingHoursStartTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkingHoursStartTime parameter specifies the time that the work day starts. @@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkingHoursTimeZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkingHoursTimeZone parameter specifies the time zone that's used by the WorkingHoursStartTime and WorkingHoursEndTime parameters. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md index 7ad33e450c..dd3821709f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example enables the calendar in Kai's mailbox to be searchable on the web. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the calendar folder that you want to modify. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DetailLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DetailLevel parameter specifies the level of calendar detail that's published and available to anonymous users. Valid values are: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishDateRangeFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublishDateRangeFrom parameter specifies the start date of calendar information to publish (past information). Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishDateRangeTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublishDateRangeTo parameter specifies the end date of calendar information to publish (future information). Valid values are: @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublishEnabled parameter specifies whether to publish the specified calendar information. Valid values are: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResetUrl switch replaces the existing non-public URL with a new URL for a calendar that is published without being publicly searchable. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchableUrlEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchableUrlEnabled parameter specifies whether the published calendar URL is discoverable on the web. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetAsSharingSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SetAsSharingSource switch specifies whether to set the calendar folder as a sharing source. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseHttps -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseHttps switch specifies whether to use HTTPS for the published URL of the calendar folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md index e700a98c53..2512649f93 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ For more information about RPC access through Client Access servers, see [Set-Rp ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox database that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowFileRestore -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AllowFileRestore parameter specifies whether to allow a database to be restored from a backup. Valid values are: @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagExcludeFromMonitoring -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagExcludedFromMonitoring parameter specifies whether to exclude the mailbox database from the ServerOneCopyMonitor, which alerts an administrator when a replicated database has only one healthy copy available. Valid values are: @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDatabaseMountDial -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BackgroundDatabaseMaintenance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BackgroundDatabaseMaintenance parameter specifies whether the Extensible Storage Engine (ESE) performs database maintenance. Valid values are: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarLoggingQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarLoggingQuota parameter specifies the maximum size of the log in the Recoverable Items folder of the mailbox that stores changes to calendar items. When the log exceeds this size, calendar logging is disabled until messaging records management (MRM) removes older calendar logs to free up more space. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CircularLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CircularLoggingEnabled parameter specifies whether circular logging is enabled for the database. Valid values are: @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DataMoveReplicationConstraint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DataMoveReplicationConstraint parameter specifies the throttling behavior for high availability mailbox moves. Valid values are: @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeletedItemRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeletedItemRetention parameter specifies the length of time to keep deleted items in the Recoverable Items\\Deletions folder in mailboxes. Items are moved to this folder when the user deletes items from the Deleted Items folder, empties the Deleted Items folder, or deletes items by using Shift+Delete. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EventHistoryRetentionPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EventHistoryRetentionPeriod parameter specifies the length of time to keep event data. This event data is stored in the event history table in the Exchange store. It includes information about changes to various objects in the mailbox database. You can use this parameter to prevent the event history table from becoming too large and using too much disk space. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IndexEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2016 or earlier. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromInitialProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. Valid values are: @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioningByOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IIsExcludedFromProvisioningByOperator parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioningDueToLogicalCorruption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioningDueToLogicalCorruption parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioningReason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioningReason parameter specifies the reason why you excluded the mailbox database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). The value must contain at least 10 characters. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsSuspendedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsSuspendedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. Valid values are: @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalRecipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The JournalRecipient parameter specifies the journal recipient to use for per-database journaling for all mailboxes on the database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxRetention parameter specifies the length of time to keep deleted mailboxes before they are permanently deleted or purged. @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaintenanceSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetaCacheDatabaseMaxCapacityInBytes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MetaCacheDatabaseMaxCapacityInBytes parameter specifies the size of the metacache database in bytes. To convert gigabytes to bytes, multiply the value by 1024^3. For terabytes to bytes, multiply by 1024^4. @@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MountAtStartup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MountAtStartup parameter specifies whether to mount the mailbox database when the Microsoft Exchange Information Store service starts. Valid values are: @@ -712,7 +712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mailbox database. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the offline address book that's associated with the mailbox database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the offline address book. For example: @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProhibitSendQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send new messages, and the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProhibitSendReceiveQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send or receive new messages. Messages sent to the mailbox are returned to the sender with a descriptive error message. This value effectively determines the maximum size of the mailbox. @@ -818,7 +818,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QuotaNotificationSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecoverableItemsQuota parameter specifies the maximum size for the Recoverable Items folder of the mailbox. If the Recoverable Items folder reaches or exceeds this size, it no longer accepts messages. @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecoverableItemsWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the Recoverable Items folder for the mailbox. If the Recoverable Items folder reaches or exceeds this size, Exchange logs an event to the application event log. @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainDeletedItemsUntilBackup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RetainDeletedItemsUntilBackup parameter specifies whether to keep items in the Recoverable Items\\Deletions folder of the mailbox until the next database backup occurs. Valid values are: @@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md index 91532aaab8..e85cf0fabf 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example configures an activation preference of 3 for the copy of the databa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the database whose copy is being modified. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivationPreference -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActivationPreference parameter value is used as part of Active Manager's best copy selection process and to redistribute active mailbox databases throughout the database availability group (DAG) when using the RedistributeActiveDatabases.ps1 script. The value for the ActivationPreference parameter is a number equal to or greater than 1, where 1 is at the top of the preference order. The position number can't be larger than the number of database copies of the mailbox database. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayLagTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayLagTime parameter specifies the amount of time that the Microsoft Exchange Replication service should wait before replaying log files that have been copied to the passive database copy. Setting this parameter to a value greater than 0 creates a lagged database copy. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TruncationLagTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TruncationLagTime parameter specifies the amount of time that the Microsoft Exchange Replication service should wait before truncating log files that have replayed into the passive copy of the database. The time period begins after the log is successfully replayed into the copy of the database. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseCopyAutoActivationPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayLagMaxDelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayLagMaxDelay parameter specifies the maximum delay for lagged database copy play down (also known as deferred lagged copy play down). If the disk read IO latency is greater than 25 ms, lagged copy play down is delayed up to the value of this parameter. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md index b81f0286db..fe5b9cea85 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ This example changes the second export request Ayla\\MailboxExport1 to accept up ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specify a name for the export request, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies the name of the batch. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default value is 30 days. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RehomeRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RehomeRequest switch tells the Microsoft Exchange Mailbox Replication service (MRS) that the request needs to be moved to the same database as the mailbox that's being exported. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMerging parameter specifies steps in the export that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md index 223ac5f5c3..72c6e76489 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example changes an existing user's permissions to Edito ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the target mailbox and folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessRights parameter specifies the permissions that you want to modify for the user on the mailbox folder. The values that you specify replace the existing permissions for the user on the folder. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies the mailbox, mail user, or mail-enabled security group (security principal) that's granted permission to the mailbox folder. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md index 86bba500cd..fb66c38f42 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example finds all import requests that have a status of Suspended, and then ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specified a name for the import request with the New-MailboxImportRequest cmdlet, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name of the batch. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RehomeRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies the steps in the import that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md index 7c763e94da..264b0132ca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example identifies mailboxes where contacts are treated as trusted senders ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedSendersAndDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BlockedSendersAndDomains parameter specifies the Blocked Senders list, which is a list of sender email addresses and domains whose messages are automatically sent to the Junk Email folder. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Move email from these senders or domains to my Junk Email folder. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContactsTrusted -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ContactsTrusted parameter specifies whether the contacts in the Contacts folder are treated as trusted senders. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Trust email from my contacts. Valid values are: @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter enables or disables the junk email rule on the mailbox (a hidden Inbox rule named Junk E-mail Rule). Valid values are: @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedListsOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TrustedListsOnly parameter specifies that only messages from senders in the Safe Senders list are delivered to the Inbox. All other messages are treated as junk email. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Don't trust email unless it comes from someone in my Safe Senders and Recipients list. Valid values are: @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedRecipientsAndDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedSendersAndDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TrustedSendersAndDomains parameter specifies the Safe Senders list and Safe Recipients list, which are lists of email addresses and domains. Messages from these senders that reach the mailbox are never delivered to the Junk Email folder, regardless of the content. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Don't move email from these senders or domains to my Junk Email folder. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md index 40134436a3..22c5f6ec9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ This example sets the compose email message form to always show the Bcc field in ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AfterMoveOrDeleteBehavior -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AfterMoveOrDeleteBehavior parameter specifies the behavior after moving or deleting an email item in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysShowBcc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysShowBcc parameter shows or hides the blind carbon copy (Bcc) field when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysShowFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysShowFrom parameter shows or hides the From field when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoAddSignature -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoAddSignatureOnMobile -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoAddSignatureOnReply -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoAddSignature parameter specifies whether to automatically add signatures to reply email messages created in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CheckForForgottenAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CheckForForgottenAttachments parameter shows or hides the attachment warning prompt when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConversationSortOrder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConversationSortOrder parameter specifies the sorting of messages in the reading pane in Conversation view for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontColor -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontColor parameter specifies the default text color when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. This parameter accepts a hexadecimal color code value in the format #xxxxxx. The default value is #000000. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontFlags parameter specifies the default text effect when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontName parameter specifies the default font when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontSize parameter specifies the default text size when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFormat parameter specifies the default message format when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. Accepted values are Html and PlainText. The default value is Html. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailComposeMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmptyDeletedItemsOnLogoff -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmptyDeletedItemsOnLogoff parameter specifies whether to delete items from the Deleted Items folder when the user logs out of Outlook on the web. @@ -660,7 +660,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalReadingPanePosition -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2016 or later. It doesn't work in Exchange Online. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HideDeletedItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HideDeletedItems parameter shows or hides deleted messages in Conversation view for the user in Outlook on the web. @@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsFavoritesFolderTreeCollapsed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsFavoritesFolderTreeCollapsed parameter specifies whether to collapse the Favorites folder tree by default in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsMailRootFolderTreeCollapsed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsMailRootFolderTreeCollapsed parameter specifies whether to collapse the Mail root folder tree by default in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsReplyAllTheDefaultResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsReplyAllTheDefaultResponse parameter specifies whether Reply All is the default response for messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -830,7 +830,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkPreviewEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LinkPreviewEnabled parameter specifies whether link preview of URLs in email messages is enabled for the user in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailFolderPaneExpanded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailFolderPaneExpanded parameter specifies whether the Mail folder pane is expanded by default in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NavigationPaneViewOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NavigationPaneViewOption parameter specifies the default navigation pane view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -978,7 +978,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewItemNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NewItemNotification parameter specifies how to provide notification for the arrival of new items for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferAccessibleContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreferAccessibleContent parameter specifies whether to prefer accessible content in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1026,7 +1026,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreviewMarkAsReadBehavior -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreviewMarkAsReadBehavior parameter specifies the options for marking an item as Read in the reading pane for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreviewMarkAsReadDelaytime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreviewMarkAsReadDelaytime parameter specifies the time in seconds to wait before marking an item as Read for the user in Outlook on the web. @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadReceiptResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadReceiptResponse parameter specifies how to respond to requests for read receipts for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowConversationAsTree -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowConversationAsTree parameter specifies how to sort messages in the list view in an expanded conversation for the user in Outlook on the web. @@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowPreviewTextInListView -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowPreviewTextInListView parameter specifies whether to show preview text for messages in list view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowReadingPaneOnFirstLoad -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowReadingPaneOnFirstLoad parameter specifies whether to show the reading pane when the user opens in Outlook on the web for the first time. Valid values are: @@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowSenderOnTopInListView -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowSenderOnTopInListView parameter specifies whether to show the message sender on top in list view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1272,7 +1272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowUpNext -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowUpNext parameter specifies whether the next upcoming event should be shown above the mail list view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1293,7 +1293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignatureHtml -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignatureText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -1377,7 +1377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignatureTextOnMobile -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -1479,7 +1479,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDefaultSignatureOnMobile -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseDefaultSignatureOnMobile parameter specifies whether to add the default email signature to messages created by the user in Outlook on the web for devices. The user configures the default signature in Outlook. @@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md index d9fdf8c9c0..ba7752e06d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ This example sets Megan Bowen mailbox language to Spanish Argentina, sets the da ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DateFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DateFormat parameter specifies a valid date format based on the current or specified language for the mailbox. For example, if the language is set to en-US, valid DateFormat parameter values include: @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Language parameter specifies the language for the mailbox. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizeDefaultFolderName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizeDefaultFolderName switch localizes the default folder names of the mailbox in the current or specified language. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeFormat parameter specifies a valid time format based on the current or specified language value for the mailbox. For example, if the language is set to en-us, valid TimeFormat parameter values include: @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeZone parameter specifies the time zone for the mailbox. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index fc864e68e8..699f3b7b49 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example changes the first restore request for Kweku's mailbox to skip 100 c ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name` @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name of the batch. Use this parameter to change, create, or remove a batch name. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the status of a completed restore request is set to Completed. If this parameter is set to a value of 0, the status is cleared immediately instead of changing it to Completed. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RehomeRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies folder-related items to skip when restoring the mailbox. Use one of the following values: @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md index 0e5035c4d9..7506c5c6b8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example adds all public folders to the existing ma ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the mailbox search that you want to modify. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllPublicFolderSources -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllPublicFolderSources parameter specifies whether to include all public folders in the organization in the search. Valid values are: @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllSourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllSourceMailboxes parameter specifies whether to include all mailboxes in the search. Valid values are: @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EstimateOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EstimateOnly switch provides only an estimate of the number of items that will be returned without copying message to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDuplicateMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDuplicateMessages parameter eliminates duplication of messages across mailboxes in an In-Place eDiscovery search. Valid values are: @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeKeywordStatistics -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeKeywordStatistics switch returns keyword statistics (number of instances for each keyword). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeUnsearchableItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeUnsearchableItems parameter specifies whether items that couldn't be indexed by Exchange Search should be included in the results. Valid values are: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InPlaceHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InPlaceHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether to set an In-Place Hold on items in the search results. Valid values are: @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemHoldPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ItemHoldPeriod parameter specifies the number of days for the In-Place Hold onthe mailbox items (all items or the mailbox items that are returned in the search query results). You use this parameter with the InPlaceHoldEnabled parameter to set an In-Place Hold. The duration is calculated from the time the item is received or created in the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Language parameter specifies a locale for the mailbox search. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogLevel parameter specifies a logging level for the mailbox search. Valid values are: @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypes parameter specifies the message types to include in the search query. Valid values are: @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipients parameter specifies one or more recipients include in the search query. Messages that have the specified recipients in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields are returned in the search results. @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchQuery parameter specifies keywords for the search query by using the Keyword Query Language (KQL). For more information, see [Keyword Query Language (KQL) syntax reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/sharepoint/dev/general-development/keyword-query-language-kql-syntax-reference) and [Keyword queries and search conditions for eDiscovery](https://learn.microsoft.com/purview/ediscovery-keyword-queries-and-search-conditions). @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Senders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Senders parameter specifies one or more senders to include in the search query. Messages that have the specified sender are returned in the search results. Senders can include users, distribution groups (messages sent by members of the group), SMTP addresses, or domains. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceMailboxes parameter specifies the mailboxes to be searched. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatisticsStartIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatisticsStartIndex parameter is used by the Exchange admin center (EAC) to retrieve keyword statistics in a paged operation. @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies one or more recipients to receive a status email message upon completion of the search. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the destination mailbox where the search results are copied. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md index 7748bd0a40..3b965ef2fd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ In Exchange 2010, this example throttles the TopN Words Assistant and the Unifie ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Mailbox server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagServerConfigured -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDatabaseMountDial -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDatabaseMountDial parameter specifies the automatic database mount behavior for a continuous replication environment after a database failover on the Mailbox server. You can use the following values: @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairIntervalEndWindow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairIntervalEndWindow parameter specifies the number of days into the future to repair calendar items in mailboxes on the Mailbox server. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogDirectorySizeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogDirectorySizeLimit parameter specifies the maximum size of calendar repair log directory on the Mailbox server. When the directory reaches its maximum size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the Calendar Repair Attendant logs items that it repairs on the Mailbox server. The repair log doesn't contain failed repair attempts. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogFileAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogFileAgeLimit parameter specifies the calendar repair log maximum file age on the Mailbox server. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 10 days. @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogPath parameter specifies the location of the calendar repair log files on the Mailbox server. The default value is %ExchangeInstallPath%Logging\\Calendar Repair Assistant. @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogSubjectLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogSubjectLoggingEnabled parameter specifies whether to include the subject of repaired calendar items in the calendar repair log on the Mailbox server. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairMissingItemFixDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairMissingItemFixDisabled parameter specifies whether the Calendar Repair Assistant fixes missing calendar items in mailboxes on the Mailbox server.Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairMode parameter specifies the Calendar Repair Assistant mode on the Mailbox server. Valid values for this parameter are ValidateOnly or RepairAndValidate. The default value is RepairAndValidate. @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseCopyActivationDisabledAndMoveNow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseCopyActivationDisabledAndMoveNow parameter specifies whether to prevent databases from being mounted on this Mailbox server if there are other healthy copies of the databases on other Mailbox servers. It also immediately moves any mounted databases on the server to other servers if copies exist and are healthy. @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseCopyAutoActivationPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseCopyAutoActivationPolicy parameter specifies the type of automatic activation available for mailbox database copies on the specified Mailbox server. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FaultZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceGroupMetricsGeneration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceGroupMetricsGeneration parameter specifies that group metrics information must be generated on the Mailbox server regardless of whether that server generates an offline address book (OAB). Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1027,7 +1027,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter specifies that the Mailbox server isn't considered by the OAB provisioning load balancer. Valid values are: @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalingLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The JournalingLogForManagedFoldersEnabled parameter specifies whether journaling activity is recorded in the managed folder log on the Mailbox server.Valid input for this parameter is$true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Locale parameter specifies the locale of the Mailbox server. A locale is a collection of language-related user preferences such as writing system, calendar, and date format. The following are examples: @@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogDirectorySizeLimitForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1150,7 +1150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileAgeLimitForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileSizeLimitForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1206,7 +1206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPathForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1288,7 +1288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedFolderAssistantSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: Although this parameter is available in Exchange 2016 and Exchange 2019, it's only used for coexistence with previous versions of Exchange. For more information, see [Configure and run the Managed Folder Assistant in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/policy-and-compliance/mrm/configure-managed-folder-assistant). @@ -1383,7 +1383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIEncryptionRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MAPIEncryptionRequired parameter specifies whether Exchange blocks MAPI client connections to the Mailbox server that don't use encrypted remote procedure calls (RPCs). Valid input for this parameter is$true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumActiveDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaximumActiveDatabases parameter specifies the maximum number of databases that can be mounted on the Mailbox server. @@ -1423,7 +1423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases parameter specifies a preferred maximum number of databases that theMailbox server should have. This value is different from the actual maximum, which is configured using the MaximumActiveDatabases parameter. The value of MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases is only honored during best copy and server selection, database and server switchovers, and when rebalancing the DAG. @@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1606,7 +1606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1624,7 +1624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1642,7 +1642,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1660,7 +1660,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1890,7 +1890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharingPolicySchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SharingPolicySchedule parameter specifies the intervals each week during which the sharing policy runs on the Mailbox server. The Sharing Policy Assistant checks permissions on shared calendar items and contact folders in users' mailboxes against the assigned sharing policy. The assistant lowers or removes permissions according to the policy. @@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -2405,7 +2405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubmissionServerOverrideList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2527,7 +2527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacDiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WacDiscoveryEndpoint parameter specifies the discovery endpoint for Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server) for all mailboxes on the server. For example, `https://oos.internal.contoso.com/hosting/discovery`. @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md index ad74531f90..21303b2650 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets the spelling checker to ignore words containing numbers for me ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CheckBeforeSend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CheckBeforeSend parameter specifies whether Outlook on the web checks the spelling for every message when the user clicks Send in the new message form. Valid values are$true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DictionaryLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DictionaryLanguage parameter specifies the dictionary language to use when the spelling checker checks the spelling in messages. Valid values are: @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreMixedDigits -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreMixedDigits parameter specifies whether the spelling checker ignores words that contain numbers. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreUppercase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreUppercase parameter specifies whether the spelling checker ignores words that contain only uppercase letters, for example, acronyms. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md index 98eb1644f0..d36117eb6e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ This example sets the ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter to C:\\SMTP Protocol Logs ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the connectivity log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the connectivity log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all connectivity logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 1000 MB. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each connectivity log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogPath parameter specifies the default connectivity log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\Connectivity. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables connectivity logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the ConnectivityLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentConversionTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ContentConversionTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether content conversion tracing is enabled. Content conversion tracing captures content conversion failures that occur in the Transport service or in the Mailbox Transport service on the Mailbox server. The default value is $false. Content conversion tracing captures a maximum of 128 MB of content conversion failures. When the 128 MB limit is reached, no more content conversion failures are captured. Content conversion tracing captures the complete contents of email messages to the path specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter. Make sure that you restrict access to this directory. The permissions required on the directory specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter are as follows: @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log for the Mailbox Transport Delivery service is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file of the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all Mailbox Transport Delivery service agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file for the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location for the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\AgentLog\\Delivery. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MailboxDeliveryAgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryConnectorMaxInboundConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryConnectorMaxInboundConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of inbound connections for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. The default value is 5000. If you enter the value unlimited, no connection limit is imposed on the mailbox delivery Receive connector. @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel parameter enables or disables SMTP protocol logging for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Valid values are: @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryConnectorSmtpUtf8Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryConnectorSmtpUtf8Enabled parameters or disables email address internationalization (EAI) support for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Valid values are: @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the mailbox delivery throttling log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the mailbox delivery throttling log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all mailbox delivery throttling logs in the mailbox delivery throttling log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 200 MB. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each mailbox delivery throttling log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogPath parameter specifies the default mailbox delivery throttling log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Throttling\\Delivery. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables mailbox delivery throttling logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log is enabled for the Mailbox Transport Submission service. The default value is $true. @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file of the Mailbox Transport Submission service. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all Mailbox Transport Submission service agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file for the Mailbox Transport Submission service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location for the Mailbox Transport Submission service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\AgentLog\\Submission. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MailboxSubmissionAgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries parameter specifies the maximum number of delivery threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to deliver messages to mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Microsoft Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions parameter specifies the maximum number of submission threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to send messages from mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. @@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable pipeline tracing. Pipeline tracing captures message snapshot files that record the changes made to the message by each transport agent configured in the transport service on the server. Pipeline tracing creates verbose log files that accumulate quickly. Pipeline tracing should only be enabled for a short time to provide in-depth diagnostic information that enables you to troubleshoot problems. In addition to troubleshooting, you can use pipeline tracing to validate changes that you make to the configuration of the transport service where you enable pipeline tracing. The default value is $false. @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingPath parameter specifies the location of the pipeline tracing logs. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\PipelineTracing. The path must be local to the Exchange server. @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingSenderAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingSenderAddress parameter specifies the sender email address that invokes pipeline tracing. Only messages from this address generate pipeline tracing output. The address can be either inside or outside the Exchange organization. Depending on your requirements, you might have to set this parameter to different sender addresses and send new messages to start the transport agents or routes that you want to test. The default value of this parameter is $null. @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Log files that are older than the specified value are automatically deleted. @@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpReceive. The log files are automatically stored in the Delivery subdirectory. @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum routing table log age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the routing table log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogPath parameter specifies the directory location where routing table log files should be stored. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\Routing. Setting this parameter to $null disables routing table logging. @@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. Log files that are older than the specified value are automatically deleted. @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpSend. Log files are automatically stored in the following subdirectories: @@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md index d697405ee3..4bcf5151bb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ The last two commands remove the seventh file type that's displayed in the list. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter policy you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AdminDisplayName parameter specifies a description for the policy. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassInboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOutboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAlertText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromAddress parameter specifies the custom From address to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromName parameter specifies the custom From name to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomNotifications parameter enables or disables the customization of notification messages for malware detections. Valid values are: @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MakeDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MakeDefault switch makes this malware filter policy the default policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md index c9a8199c78..4d1d9b9479 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example adds an exception to the malware filter rule named Contoso Recipien ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example, you can use the name, GUID, or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter rule. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Comments parameter specifies informative comments for the rule, such as what the rule is used for or how it has changed over time. The length of the comment can't exceed 1024 characters. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentToMemberOf parameter specifies an exception that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MalwareFilterPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MalwareFilterPolicy parameter specifies the malware filter policy that's associated with the malware filter rule. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the malware filter rule. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientDomainIs parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentTo parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentToMemberOf parameter specifies a condition that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md index 3f204ae47a..fa0f636452 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example sets the following Malware agent settings on the Mailbox server nam ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server where you want to configure the anti-malware settings. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassFiltering -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassFiltering parameter temporarily bypasses malware filtering without disabling the Malware agent on the server. The Malware agent is still active, and the agent is still called for every message, but no malware filtering is actually performed. This allows you to temporarily disable and then enable malware filtering on the server without disrupting mail flow by restarting the Microsoft Exchange Transport service. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeferAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeferAttempts parameter specifies the maximum number of times to defer a message that can't be scanned by the Malware agent. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 1 and 5. The default value is 3. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeferWaitTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeferWaitTime parameter specifies the time period in minutes to increase the interval to resubmit messages for malware filtering in an effort to reduce the workload on the server. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceRescan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceRescan parameter specifies that messages should be scanned by the malware agent, even if the message was already scanned by cloud-based protection. Valid values are: @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinimumSuccessfulEngineScans -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimaryUpdatePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrimaryUpdatePath parameter specifies where to download malware scanning engine updates. The default value is `http://forefrontdl.microsoft.com/server/scanengineupdate`. The location specified by the PrimaryUpdatePath parameter is always tried first. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScanErrorAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ScanErrorAction parameter specifies the action to take when a message can't be scanned by the malware filter. Valid values for this parameter are Block or Allow. The default value is Block. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScanTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ScanTimeout parameter specifies the timeout interval in seconds for messages that can't be scanned by the malware filter. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 10 and 900. The default value is 300 (5 minutes). @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryUpdatePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryUpdatePath parameter specifies an alternate download location for malware scanning engine updates. The default values is blank ($null). This means no alternate download location is specified. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateFrequency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateFrequency parameter specifies the frequency interval in minutes to check for malware scanning engine updates. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 1 and 38880 (27 days). The default value is 60 (one hour). The locations to check for updates are specified by the PrimaryUpdatePath and SecondaryUpdatePath parameters. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateTimeout parameter specifies the timeout interval in seconds to use when checking for malware scanning engine updates. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 60 and 300. The default value is 150 seconds (2.5 minutes). @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md index e42e17a347..171f044fc0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy "PM Storage Template1" -Name "PM Storage Template This example changes the name of the managed folder mailbox policy PM Storage Template1 to PM Storage Template2. -The Identity parameter is a positional parameter. Positional parameters can be used without the label (Identity). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). +The Identity parameter is positional, which means you can use it without the -Identity label in the supported location in the command (in this case, first). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). ### Example 2 ```powershell @@ -58,7 +58,11 @@ This example links the managed custom folders Custom Folder 1 and Custom Folder > Applicable: Exchange Server 2010 -The Identity parameter specifies the name, distinguished name (DN), or GUID of the managed folder mailbox policy. +The Identity parameter specifies the managed folder mailbox policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: + +- Name +- Distinguished name (DN) +- GUID ```yaml Type: MailboxPolicyIdParameter diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md index a0c404aed0..3b5d137088 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ This example restricts the Distribution Groups\_Cairns Admins role assignment us ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the management role assignment to modify. If the name of the management role contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAdministrativeUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based management scope to associate with this management role assignment. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the management role assignment is enabled or disabled. The valid values are $true and $false. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based exclusive management scope to associate with this management role assignment. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameter specifies the OU to scope the new role assignment to. If the OU name contains spaces, enclose the domain and OU in quotation marks ("). @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRelativeWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRelativeWriteScope parameter specifies the type of restriction to apply to a recipient scope. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md index 5ab67ee695..d44f3a41d9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example adds the Location parameter to the Mailbox ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role entry that you want to modify. This parameter uses the syntax: `\` (for example, `CustomRole\Set-Mailbox`). @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddParameter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AddParameter switch specifies that you're adding parameters to the specified role entry. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Parameters parameter specifies the parameters to be added to or removed from the role entry. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveParameter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RemoveParameter switch specifies that you're removing parameters to the specified role entry. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md index 8b671cdcef..cb4707ab96 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ This example changes the Active Directory site used in the server restriction fi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the management scope to modify. If the name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the management scope. The management scope name can be a maximum of 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter uses OPATH filter syntax to specify the recipients that are included in the scope. The syntax is `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRoot parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) under which the filter specified with the RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter should be applied. Valid input for this parameter is an OU or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md index bd261af787..cd48e72f02 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example makes the following configuration changes to the MAPI virtual direc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the MAPI virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplyDefaults switch specifies whether to apply the correct defaults to the related internal IIS application settings. Typically, this switch is used only by Exchange Setup during the installation of Exchange Cumulative Updates or Service Packs and you shouldn't need to use it. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IISAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IISAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods that are enabled on the virtual directory in Internet Information Services (IIS). Valid values are: @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md index c5de61e4a9..c2760e2c2a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example makes the following configuration changes to the message classifica ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the message classification that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the message classification. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassificationID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ClassificationID parameter specifies the classification ID (GUID) of an existing message classification that you want to import and use in your Exchange organization. Use this parameter if you're configuring message classifications that span two Exchange forests in the same organization. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the title of the message classification that's displayed in Outlook and selected by users. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayPrecedence -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayPrecedence parameter specifies the relative precedence of the message classification to other message classifications that might be applied to a specified message. Valid values are: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the message classification. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermissionMenuVisible -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PermissionMenuVisible parameter specifies whether the values that you entered for the DisplayName and RecipientDescription parameters are displayed in Outlook as the user composes a message. Valid values are: @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook recipient when they receive a message that has the message classification applied. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainClassificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetainClassificationEnabled parameter specifies whether the message classification should persist with the message if the message is forwarded or replied to. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SenderDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook senders when they select a message classification to apply to a message before they send the message. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md index f6ae4c00ee..16801ba5be 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example updates MigrationBatch01 by approving all of the skipped items for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the migration batch that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the migration batch. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv parameter specifies whether to allow extra columns in the CSV file that aren't used by migration. Valid values are: @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the migration request is ready to complete. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CSVData parameter specifies the CSV file that contains information about the user mailboxes to be moved or migrated. The required attributes in the header row of the CSV file vary depending on the type of migration. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationEmails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationEmails parameter specifies one or more email addresses that migration status reports are sent to. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportInterval parameter specifies how frequently emailed reports should be sent to the email addresses listed within NotificationEmails. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipReports -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipReports switch specifies that you want to skip automatic reporting for the migration. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourcePublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the data migration for the users within the batch is started. The migration is prepared, but the actual data migration for users within the batch doesn't start until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SyncNow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SyncNow switch starts an immediate sync for users that have already reached Synced status, but doesn't resume any Failed users. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Update -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Update switch sets the Update flag on the migration batch. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md index 605b6fd87b..cfcd6935cd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets the migration system to only allow 100 concurrent migrations. ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Features -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxNumberOfBatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md index ff7cf2b290..be05400cb8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ This example changes the MaxConcurrentMigrations setting to 10 on the Onboarding ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the migration endpoint you want to configure. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credentials parameter specifies the username and password for connecting to the remote endpoint. Credentials should be used when creating either a staged or cutover Exchange endpoint or a RemoteMove endpoint. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs parameter specifies the maximum number of incremental syncs allowed for this endpoint at a specified time. This value must be less or equal to MaxConcurrentMigrations parameter. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentMigrations parameter specifies the maximum number of migrated mailboxes for this endpoint at a specified time. This parameter is applicable for all migration types. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteServer parameter specifies the remote server depending on the protocol type for moves: @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipVerification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipVerification switch skips verifying that the remote server is reachable when creating a migration endpoint. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md index 9e26ca12a5..b5bd1e1a1a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example approves all of the skipped items encountered for the user laura@co ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the email address of the user that's being migrated. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the migration request is ready to complete. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SyncNow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SyncNow switch specifies whether to trigger an incremental sync for the migrated user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md index 1418931139..4a8c96d67e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ This example sets several policy settings for the mobile device mailbox policy D ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities are allowed on the mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter specifies whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile device's camera is allowed. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a personal email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access to email accounts using non-Microsoft mobile device email programs. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile device can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML-formatted email is enabled on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. If set to $false, all email is converted to plain text before synchronization occurs. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile device can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. This process is also known as tethering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether the policy can be sent to the mobile device over a cellular data connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter specifies whether all mobile devices can synchronize with Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access by non-Microsoft email programs. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile device can initiate a remote desktop connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimplePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimplePassword parameter specifies whether a simple password is allowed on the mobile device. A simple password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the mobile device can negotiate the encryption algorithm if a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the mobile device can access information stored on a storage card. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages can be executed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericPasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericPasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the password for the mobile device must be alphanumeric. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a configured list of approved applications for the device. @@ -634,7 +634,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether attachments can be downloaded on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for iOS and Android. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent to the mobile device. @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default mobile device mailbox policy. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value for the built-in mobile device mailbox policy named Default is $true. The default value for new mobile device mailbox policies that you create is $false. @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is a size value between 0 and 2147482624 bytes (approximately 2 GB), or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -803,7 +803,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeLock parameter specifies the length of time that the mobile device can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate it. Valid values are: @@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxPasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxPasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the mobile device. @@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinPasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the character sets that are required in the password of the mobile device. The character sets are: @@ -971,7 +971,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for Android. @@ -993,7 +993,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the friendly name of the mobile device mailbox policy. @@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordEnabled parameter specifies whether a password is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordExpiration parameter specifies how long a password can be used on a mobile device before the user is forced to change the password. Valid values are: @@ -1052,7 +1052,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of unique new passwords that need to be created on the mobile device before an old password can be reused. @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether the recovery password for the mobile device is stored in Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1092,7 +1092,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1110,7 +1110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send encrypted S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's required to encrypt S/MIME messages on a mobile device. The valid values for this parameter are: @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the mobile device must synchronize manually while roaming. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1172,7 +1172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's used to sign S/MIME messages on the mobile device. @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send signed S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether storage card encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter specifies a list of applications that can't be run in ROM on the mobile device. @@ -1248,7 +1248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md index ea5a7779aa..47f81b815c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ This example changes the move request for Sruthi to approve all skipped items en ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a different name for a batch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompleteAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is completed. The request is started, but not completed until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncrementalSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncrementalSyncInterval parameter specifies the wait time between incremental syncs. Use this parameter with the CompleteAfter parameter to create a move request that does periodic incremental syncs after the initial sync is complete. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the move that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreventCompletion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreventCompletion parameter specifies whether to run the move request, but not allow it to complete. Valid values are: @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Protect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteCredential parameter specifies the username and password an administrator who has permission to perform the mailbox move. @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteGlobalCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteGlobalCatalog parameter specifies the FQDN of the global catalog server for the remote forest. @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteHostName parameter specifies the FQDN of the cross-forest organization from which you're moving the mailbox. @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is started. The request isn't started until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendWhenReadyToComplete parameter specifies whether to suspend the move request before it reaches the status of CompletionInProgress. Instead of this parameter, we recommend using CompleteAfter parameter. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md index 55cdd0e679..d128aa3891 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example configures the specified notification event to send notification em ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the notification event that you want to modify. You identify the notification event by its AlternativeID property value (a GUID). You can find this value by running the command: `Get-Notification | Format-List DisplayName,AlternativeID,StartTime,Status,Type`. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationEmails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationEmails parameter specifies the recipients for notification emails related to notification events. You can specify multiple recipients separated by commas. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProcessType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md index b5baa5d5b7..c998400e9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example changes the external URL of the OAB virtual directory OAB (Default ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OAB virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PollInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2010. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSSL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSSL parameter specifies whether the client connection to the virtual directory requires Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption. Valid values are: @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md index 9aa1ab5a32..985662bed9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example changes the organization mailbox that's responsible for generating ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the OAB that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists or global address lists that are included in the OAB. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyMandatoryProperties -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyMandatoryProperties switch specifies whether to update the mandatory properties of a legacy OAB. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfiguredAttributes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConfiguredAttributes parameter specifies the recipient MAPI properties that are available in the OAB. This parameter uses the syntax: `"Name1,Type1","Name2,Type2",..."NameN,TypeN"` where Name is the name of the MAPI property (for example, MobileTelephoneNumber), and Type is the value ANR (ambiguous name resolution), Value, or Indicator. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiffRetentionPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiffRetentionPeriod parameter specifies the number of days that the OAB difference files are stored on the server. Valid values are integers from 7 to 1825, or the value unlimited. The default value is 30. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FullOabDownloadPreventionThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GeneratingMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalWebDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether the OAB is used by all mailboxes and mailbox databases that don't have an OAB specified. Valid values are: @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxBinaryPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMultivaluedBinaryPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMultivaluedStringPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxStringPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the OAB. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Schedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2010. @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowMailboxDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpgradeFromE14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDefaultAttributes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseDefaultAttributes switch specifies whether to revert the recipient MAPI properties that are available in the OAB to the default list. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Versions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Versions parameter specifies the OAB versions that are generated for client download. Valid values are: @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ZipOabFilesBeforeUploading -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ZipOabFilesBeforeUploading specifies whether to use ZIP file compression on the OAB files before uploading them to the server. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md index 35f5f42bd8..76d5771931 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutEnabled parameter enables or disables the inactivity interval for automatic logoff in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App). Valid values are: @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutInterval parameter specifies the period of inactivity that causes an automatic logoff in Outlook on the web. @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutWithSingleSignOnEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutWithSingleSignOnEnabled parameter enables or disables the inactivity interval for automatic logoff for single sign-on in Outlook on the Web. Valid values are: @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsAudienceUris -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsAuthenticationConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsEncryptCertificateThumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsIssuer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -805,7 +805,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsSignCertificateThumbprints -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppsForOfficeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AppsForOfficeEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable apps for Outlook features. By default, the parameter is set to $true. If the flag is set to $false, no new apps can be activated for any user in the organization. @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AsyncSendEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AsyncSendEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable async send in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ByteEncoderTypeFor7BitCharsets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ByteEncoderTypeFor7BitCharsets parameter specifies the 7-bit transfer encoding method for MIME format for messages sent to this remote domain. The valid values for this parameter are: @@ -1477,7 +1477,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1498,7 +1498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectorsActionableMessagesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConnectorsActionableMessagesEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable actionable buttons in messages (connector cards) from connected apps on Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectorsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConnectorsEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable all connected apps in organization. Valid values are: @@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomerFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1700,7 +1700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAuthenticationPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DefaultAuthenticationPolicy parameter specifies the authentication policy that's used for the whole organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderAgeLimit parameter specifies the default age limit for the contents of public folders across the entire organization. Content in a public folder is automatically deleted when this age limit is exceeded. This attribute applies to all public folders in the organization that don't have their own AgeLimit setting. @@ -1815,7 +1815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderDeletedItemRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderDeletedItemRetention parameter specifies the default value of the length of time to retain deleted items for public folders across the entire organization. This attribute applies to all public folders in the organization that don't have their own RetainDeletedItemsFor attribute set. @@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderIssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderIssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the default value across the entire organization for the public folder size at which a warning message is sent to this folder's owners, warning that the public folder is almost full. This attribute applies to all public folders within the organization that don't have their own warning quota attribute set. The default value of this attribute is unlimited. @@ -1863,7 +1863,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderMaxItemSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderMaxItemSize parameter specifies the default maximum size for posted items within public folders across the entire organization. Items larger than the value of the DefaultPublicFolderMaxItemSize parameter are rejected. This attribute applies to all public folders within the organization that don't have their own MaxItemSize attribute set. The default value of this attribute is unlimited. @@ -1893,7 +1893,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderMovedItemRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderMovedItemRetention parameter specifies how long items that have been moved between mailboxes are kept in the source mailbox for recovery purposes before being removed by the Public Folder Assistant. @@ -1913,7 +1913,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderProhibitPostQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderProhibitPostQuota parameter specifies the size of a public folder at which users are notified that the public folder is full. Users can't post to a folder whose size is larger than the DefaultPublicFolderProhibitPostQuota parameter value. The default value of this attribute is unlimited. @@ -2026,7 +2026,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DistributionGroupDefaultOU -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DistributionGroupDefaultOU parameter specifies the container where distribution groups are created by default. @@ -2044,7 +2044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DistributionGroupNameBlockedWordsList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DistributionGroupNameBlockedWordsList parameter specifies words that can't be included in the Display Name values of distribution groups that are created by users. Separate multiple values with commas. @@ -2062,7 +2062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DistributionGroupNamingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DistributionGroupNamingPolicy parameter specifies the additional text that's applied to the Display Name value of distribution groups created by users. You can require a prefix, a suffix, or both. The prefix and suffix can be text strings, user attribute values from the person who created the group, or a combination of text strings and attributes. @@ -2097,7 +2097,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2142,7 +2142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmptyAddressBookForNonExchangeUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2162,7 +2162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableAuthAdminReadSession -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2182,7 +2182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableDownloadDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2227,7 +2227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableOrgWidePermissionOnScopedRoles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2320,7 +2320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowEntourage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowEntourage parameter specifies whether to enable or disable Entourage 2008 to access Exchange Web Services (EWS) for the entire organization. The default value is $true. @@ -2338,7 +2338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowList parameter specifies the applications that are allowed to access EWS or REST when the EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter is set to EwsAllowList. Other applications that aren't specified by this parameter aren't allowed to access EWS or REST. You identify the application by its user agent string value. Wildcard characters (\*) are supported. @@ -2362,7 +2362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowMacOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowMacOutlook parameter enables or disables access to mailboxes by Outlook for Mac clients that use Exchange Web Services (for example, Outlook for Mac 2011 or later). @@ -2380,7 +2380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowOutlook parameter enables or disables access to mailboxes by Outlook clients that use Exchange Web Services. Outlook uses Exchange Web Services for free/busy, out-of-office settings, and calendar sharing. @@ -2398,7 +2398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsApplicationAccessPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter specifies the client applications that have access to EWS and REST. Valid values are: @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsBlockList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsBlockList parameter specifies the applications that aren't allowed to access EWS or REST when the EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter is set to EnforceBlockList. All other applications that aren't specified by this parameter are allowed to access EWS or REST. You identify the application by its user agent string value. Wildcard characters (\*) are supported. @@ -2443,7 +2443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsEnabled parameter specifies whether to globally enable or disable EWS access for the entire organization, regardless of what application is making the request. Valid values are: @@ -2664,7 +2664,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HierarchicalAddressBookRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HierarchicalAddressBookRoot parameter specifies the user, contact, or group to be used as the root organization for a hierarchical address book in the Exchange organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -2714,7 +2714,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Industry -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2768,7 +2768,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsAgendaMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2786,7 +2786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromOffboardMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2806,7 +2806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromOnboardMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2826,7 +2826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsFfoMigrationInProgress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2909,7 +2909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LeanPopoutEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LeanPopoutEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable faster loading of pop-out messages in Outlook on the web for Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge. Valid values are: @@ -2935,7 +2935,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkPreviewEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LinkPreviewEnabled parameter specifies whether link preview of URLs in email messages is allowed for the organization. Valid values are: @@ -2956,7 +2956,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDataEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2976,7 +2976,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAllTipsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsAllTipsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips are enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -2994,7 +2994,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsExternalRecipientsTipsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsExternalRecipientsTipsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips for external recipients are enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -3012,7 +3012,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsGroupMetricsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsGroupMetricsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips that rely on group metrics data are enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -3030,7 +3030,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsLargeAudienceThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsLargeAudienceThreshold parameter specifies what a large audience is. The default value is 25. @@ -3048,7 +3048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsMailboxSourcedTipsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsMailboxSourcedTipsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips that rely on mailbox data (out-of-office or full mailbox) are enabled. @@ -3066,7 +3066,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedFolderHomepage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3086,7 +3086,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MapiHttpEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3151,7 +3151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3292,7 +3292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientEmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3314,7 +3314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientEmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3336,7 +3336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientPrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3360,7 +3360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientReplyRecipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3387,7 +3387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3435,7 +3435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OabShadowDistributionOldestFileAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3455,7 +3455,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuth2ClientProfileEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OAuth2ClientProfileEnabled parameter enables or disables modern authentication in the Exchange organization. Valid values are: @@ -3506,7 +3506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationSummary -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3740,7 +3740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferredInternetCodePageForShiftJis -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -3758,7 +3758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicComputersDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicComputersDetectionEnabled parameter specifies whether Outlook on the web detects when a user signs from a public or private computer or network, and then enforces the attachment handling settings from public networks. The default is $false. However, if you set this parameter to $true, Outlook on the web determines if the user is signing in from a public computer, and all public attachment handling rules are applied and enforced. @@ -3796,7 +3796,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderMailboxesLockedForNewConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3819,7 +3819,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderMailboxesMigrationComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3842,7 +3842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderMigrationComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3862,7 +3862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFoldersEnabled parameter specifies how public folders are deployed in your organization. Valid values are: @@ -3884,7 +3884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderShowClientControl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolderShowClientControl parameter enables or disables the control access feature for public folders in Microsoft Outlook. Valid values are: @@ -3905,7 +3905,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFoldersLockedForMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3925,7 +3925,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadTrackingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadTrackingEnabled parameter specifies whether the tracking for read status for messages in an organization is enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -3963,7 +3963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshSessionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -4001,7 +4001,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePublicFolderMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemotePublicFolderMailboxes parameter specifies the identities of the public folder objects (represented as mail user objects locally) corresponding to the public folder mailboxes created in the remote forest. The public folder values set here are used only if the public folder deployment is a remote deployment. @@ -4019,7 +4019,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequiredCharsetCoverage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -4037,7 +4037,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLJunkThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4102,7 +4102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SiteMailboxCreationURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SiteMailboxCreationURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to create site mailboxes. Site mailboxes improve collaboration and user productivity by allowing access to both SharePoint documents and Exchange email in Outlook 2013 or later. @@ -4120,7 +4120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpActionableMessagesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SmtpActionableMessagesEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable action buttons in email messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -4190,7 +4190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMAvailableLanguages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4210,7 +4210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnblockUnsafeSenderPromptEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -4228,7 +4228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseIcsSyncStateStreaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4295,7 +4295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WACDiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4363,7 +4363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md index 2e0b8862f8..34afdbd64c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example disables the organization relationship with Contoso ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the organization relationship that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the organization relationship. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ArchiveAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship is configured to provide remote archive access. Valid values are: @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryReportEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DeliveryReportEnabled parameter specifies whether Delivery Reports should be shared over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainNames -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DomainNames parameter specifies the SMTP domains of the external organization. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas (for example, "contoso.com","northamerica.contoso.com"). @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship should be used to retrieve free/busy information from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessLevel parameter specifies the maximum amount of detail returned to the requesting organization. Valid values are: @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessScope parameter specifies a mail-enabled security group in the internal organization that contains users whose free/busy information is accessible by an external organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMoveEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailboxMoveEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship enables moving mailboxes to or from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips for users in this organization are returned over this organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessLevel parameter specifies the level of MailTips data externally shared over this organization relationship. This parameter can have the following values: @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessScope parameter specifies a mail-enabled security group in the internal organization that contains users whose free/busy information is accessible by an external organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the organization relationship. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationContact -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationContact parameter specifies the email address that can be used to contact the external organization (for example, administrator@fourthcoffee.com). @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotosEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhotosEnabled parameter specifies whether photos for users in the internal organization are returned over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetApplicationUri parameter specifies the target Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of the external organization. The TargetApplicationUri parameter is specified by Exchange when requesting a delegated token to retrieve free and busy information, for example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAutodiscoverEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetAutodiscoverEpr parameter specifies the Autodiscover URL of Exchange Web Services for the external organization, for example, `https://contoso.com/autodiscover/autodiscover.svc/wssecurity`. Exchange uses Autodiscover to automatically detect the correct Exchange server endpoint to use for external requests. @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetOwaURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetOwaURL parameter specifies the Outlook on the web (formerly Outlook Web App) URL of the external organization that's defined in the organization relationship. It is used for Outlook on the web redirection in a cross-premise Exchange scenario. Configuring this attribute enables users in the organization to use their current Outlook on the web URL to access Outlook on the web in the external organization. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetSharingEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetSharingEpr parameter specifies the URL of the target Exchange Web Services for the external organization. @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md index ac591d7859..a4498d90ac 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ In Exchange 2010 and Exchange 2013, this example sets the available authenticati ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAuthenticationMethod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultAuthenticationMethod parameter specifies the default authentication method for Outlook Anywhere. This parameter replaces the existing ExternalClientAuthenticationMethod, InternalClientAuthenticationMethod and IISAuthenticationMethods property values with the value you specify. Valid values are: @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalClientAuthenticationMethod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalClientAuthenticationMethod parameter specifies the authentication method that's used to authenticate external Outlook Anywhere clients. Valid values are: @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalClientsRequireSsl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalClientsRequireSsl parameter specifies whether external Outlook Anywhere clients are required to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). Valid values are: @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalHostname -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalHostname parameter specifies the external hostname for the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory. For example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IISAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IISAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication method that's used on the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory in IIS. Valid values are: @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalClientAuthenticationMethod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalClientAuthenticationMethod parameter specifies the authentication method that's used to authenticate internal Outlook Anywhere clients. Valid values are: @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalClientsRequireSsl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalClientsRequireSsl parameter specifies whether internal Outlook Anywhere clients are required to use SSL. Valid values are: @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalHostname -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalHostname parameter specifies the internal hostname for the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory. For example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory. The default value is Rpc (Default Web Site). If the value you specify contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SSLOffloading -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SSLOffloading parameter specifies whether a network device accepts SSL connections and decrypts them before proxying the connections to the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory on the Exchange server. Valid values are: @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md index e7bc6acefb..69da8ab7fc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example sets the priority of the Outlook protection rule OPR-DG-Finance to ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the rule. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate parameter specifies an RMS template to be applied to messages matching the conditions. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromDepartment parameter specifies a department name. The rule is applied to messages where the sender's department attribute matches this value. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the rule. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies a priority for the Outlook protection rule. Rule priority values can range from 0 through n-1, where n is the total number of existing Outlook protection rules. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies one or more recipients. External recipients can be specified using the SMTP address. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentToScope parameter specifies the scope of messages to which the rule applies. Valid values include: @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCanOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserCanOverride parameter specifies whether the Outlook user can override the rule behavior, either by using a different RMS template, or by removing rights protection before sending the message. Valid values include: @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md index aa50953b25..166c2ab25e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example changes the duration that the Autodiscover service settings are val ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ADIDParameter value of the MAPI protocol for which you want to set global settings. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CertPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CertPrincipalName parameter specifies the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate principal name required for connecting to Exchange from an external location. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a common name for the Outlook Provider Configuration object. This can be a user-friendly name for identification. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookProviderFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutlookProviderFlags parameter specifies how Outlook clients should connect to the Exchange server. The value can be set to ServerExclusiveConnect, ExternalClientsRequireSSL, InternalClientsRequireSSL or to None to clear the flags. The recommended value is None, which is also the default setting. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequiredClientVersions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequiredClientVersions parameter specifies the minimum version of Microsoft Outlook that's allowed to connect to the Exchange server. This information is in the Autodiscover response to the client connection request. This parameter uses the syntax `"MinimumVersion, ExpirationDate"`. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Mailbox server to use for Outlook Anywhere clients. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TTL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TTL parameter specifies the duration (in hours) that the specified settings are valid. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch.